+ All documents
Home > Documents > Eaton Hybrid Drive System TRTS2500

Eaton Hybrid Drive System TRTS2500

Date post: 08-Mar-2023
Category:
Upload: khangminh22
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
462
Service Manual Eaton Hybrid Drive System TRTS2500 August 2012 EH-11NA1206A-PBD 4-Battery PEC Model 4-Battery PEC
Transcript

Service Manual

Eaton Hybrid Drive SystemTRTS2500August 2012

EH-11NA1206A-PBD4-Battery PEC Model

4-Battery PEC

i

Warnings & Cautions

Warnings and Cautions

Throughout this service manual there are paragraphs that are marked with a title of DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These special paragraphs contain specific safety information and must be read, understood, and heeded before continuing the procedure or performing the step(s).

DANGER INDICATES YOU WILL BE SEVERLY INJURED OR KILLED IF DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE.

! WARNINGWARNING INDICATES AN IMMEDIATE HAZARD, WHICH COULD RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE.

! CAUTIONCAUTION INDICATES VEHICLE OR PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE.

Note: NOTE INDICATES ADDITIONAL DETAIL THAT WILL AID IN THE DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIR OF A COMPONENT/SYSTEM.

! WARNINGFollow the specified procedures in the indicated order to avoid personal injury:

1. IF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CONES ARE AROUND THE VEHICLE AND THE LOCKOUT IS INSTALLED ON THE PEC, THE ONLY PERSON THAT SHOULD BE ALLOWED TO START THE VEHICLE IS THE PERSON WHO SIGNED THE LOCKOUT TAG.

2. Before working on a vehicle or leaving the cab while the engine is running you should place the shift lever in “N” set the parking brake, and block the wheels.

3. For safety reasons, always engage the service brakes prior to selecting gear positions from “N.”

4. Before starting a vehicle always be seated in the driver's seat, select “N” on the shift control, and set the parking brakes.

5. When parking the vehicle or leaving the cab you should place the shift lever in “N” and set the parking brake.

6. In vehicles with ePTO, the engine and/or Motor/Generator can start in ePTO mode. Never perform any maintenance or work on vehicle, while in this mode.

7. 24-volt Battery (+) and (-) must be disconnected prior to any welding on any Hybrid equipped vehicle.

ii

High-Voltage Warnings & Cautions Warnings & Cautions

! CAUTIONDo not release the parking brake or attempt to select a gear until the air pressure is at the correct level.

! CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the transmission during towing place the shift lever in "N" and lift the drive wheels off the ground or disconnect the driveline.

High-Voltage Warnings & Cautions

• Use CO2 or Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. • The high-voltage wiring is covered in orange insulation or convoluted tubing and marked with

warning labels at the connectors.• All Eaton® Hybrid Diesel/Electric vehicles will be marked 'Hybrid' on the outside of the vehicle,

along with the shift label on the dash.• Refer to OEM for specific location of chassis mounted hybrid components. • Do NOT cut into the orange high-voltage cables.• Do NOT cut into or open the PEC.• Do NOT cut into or open the DC/DC converter.• Do NOT cut into or open the Inverter.

Warning: A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) are required prior to working on high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: The rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class “0” with leather protectors. The rubber gloves must be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the “Insulated Rubber Glove Test” section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the “High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure” should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: High-voltage cables and wiring are orange and contain a warning label at the connectors. High-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

iii

Table of ContentsWarnings & Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Voltage Work Area . . . . . . . . . 1

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications. 9

Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . 11

Hybrid Component & Connector Locations13

Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing. . . . . . . . 17

Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index . 19

Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index . . 23

Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) . . . . . 25

Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 27

Power-Up Sequence Test . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Electrical Pretest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Hybrid Electrical Pretest . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Fault Code Isolation Procedures

Fault Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Fault Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Fault Code 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fault Code 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Fault Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Fault Code 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Fault Code 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Fault Code 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Fault Code 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fault Code 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Fault Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Fault Code 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Fault Code 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Fault Code 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Fault Code 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Fault Code 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Fault Code 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Fault Code 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Fault Code 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Fault Code 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Fault Code 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Fault Code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Fault Code 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Fault Code 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Fault Code 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Fault Code 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Fault Code 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Fault Code 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Fault Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Fault Code 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Fault Code 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Fault Code 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fault Code 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Fault Code 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Fault Code 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Fault Code 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Fault Code 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

iv

Table of Contents

Fault Code Isolation Procedures (Continued)

Fault Code 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Fault Code 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Fault Code 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Fault Code 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Fault Code 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Fault Code 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Fault Code 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Fault Code 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Fault Code 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fault Code 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Fault Code 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Fault Code 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Fault Code 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Fault Code 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Fault Code 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Fault Code 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Fault Code 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Fault Code 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Fault Code 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Fault Code 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fault Code 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Fault Code 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Fault Code 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Fault Code 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Fault Code 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Fault Code 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Fault Code 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Fault Code 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Fault Code 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Fault Code 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Fault Code 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Fault Code 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Fault Code 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Fault Code 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Fault Code 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Fault Code 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Fault Code 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Fault Code 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Fault Code 166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Front Box Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Engine Crank Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Hybrid Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . 423

Gear Engagement Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Connector Pin Description . . . . . . . . . 435

1

Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Voltage Work Area

Insulated Rubber Glove Test

! WARNINGThe rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class “0” with leather protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the “Diagnostic Tools” section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

• The insulated rubber gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class “0” rated. They must be inspected before each use and must always be worn in conjunction with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the insulated rubber glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage.

• Roll the glove up from the open end until the lower portion of the glove begins to balloon from the resulting air pressure. If the glove leaks any air it must not be used.

• The gloves should not be used if they exhibit any signs of wear and tear.• The leather gloves must always be worn over the rubber insulating gloves in order to protect

them.• The rubber insulating gloves must be class “0” and meet all of the American Safety Testing

Materials Standards.

High-Voltage Work Area Requirements

! WARNINGA buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The buffer zone is required only when working on the high-voltage DC or AC systems and is called out both in the “High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure” and the individual repair procedures.

• Position the vehicle in the service bay.• Position four orange cones around the corners of the vehicle to mark off a 1m (3 ft.) perimeter

around the vehicle.• Do not allow any unauthorized personnel into the buffer zone during repairs involving high-

voltage. Only personnel trained for service on the high-voltage system are to be permitted in the buffer zone.

2

Insulated Rubber Glove Test Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Volt-

3

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures

Warning: A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) are required prior to working on high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: The rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class “0” with leather protectors. The rubber gloves must be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the “Insulated Rubber Glove Test” section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the “High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure” must be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) must be worn when working on any high- voltage cables. The “High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure” must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Warning: High-voltage cables and wiring are orange and contain a warning label at the connectors. High-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class “0” with leather protectors) must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Air Filter Cover Wing Nuts

Exhaust Duct

PEC Service Switch Access Panel Covers

Access Panel Security Screws

Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector

Top Cover

Air Filter Cover

High-Voltage DC Connector to Inverter

Air Outlet

Access Panel (On side not shown)

Cooling Pipes

8 Mounting Holes (Mounting hardware supplied by OEM)

Cover Bolts

Lifting EyesCover Security Screws

4

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-

4-Battery High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure

1. Follow “High-Voltage Work Area” procedure.

2. Locate the red PEC Service Switch on the front of the PEC and push to the “Off” position.

3. Turn ignition key “On”.

4. Allow the system to set for a minimum of 5 minutes to discharge high-voltage.

5. Connect ServiceRanger.

6. Select Vehicle Data Monitor from the main menu.

7. Select J1939 HV Battery.

8. Monitor the J1939 HV Battery (Parameter 520323) voltage until it displays 30 volts or less.Note: If after 5 minutes J1939 HV Battery does not display 30 volts or less, contact Roadranger

Call Center at 1-800-826-4357.

9. Turn ignition key “Off”.

10. Proceed to repair or troubleshooting step. Perform the 4-Battery PEC Isolation Procedure before making any internal repairs to the 4-Battery PEC.

PEC Service Switch

2

5 6 7 8

5

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures

4-Battery High-Voltage Isolation Procedure

1. After performing the “High-Voltage Service Shut-Down Procedure”, if removal is necessary, refer to the “4-Battery Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) Removal and Installation” procedure in the service manual TRSM2000.

2. Using a 13 mm socket, remove the 14 nuts and lock washers used to secure both access panels. Using a T-27 Plus bit, remove the two security screws and lock washers used to secure the access panels. Remove the access panel and gaskets.

3. Put on high voltage “0” rated gloves and leather protectors.

4. Remove the 4-Battery PEC main fuses by lifting up on each handle and gently pulling each fuse from the socket.

Note: There are two main fuses in the 4-Battery PEC.

AccessPanels

Access Panel Security Screws

Main Fuses

6

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-

5. Wearing the high voltage “0” rated gloves and leather protectors, pull the battery connections following the sequence in the image below.

6. To complete the 4-Battery PEC High-Voltage Isolation Procedure, it is required to place the access covers back on the 4-Battery PEC. Secure access covers with lock washers and nuts to service the 4-Battery PEC.

7. Proceed to repair or troubleshooting step.

1 2 3 4

7

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures

4-Battery PEC High-Voltage Service Power-Up Procedure

1. Remove both access covers.

2. Put on high voltage “0” rated gloves and leather protectors.

3. Reinstall battery connections following the sequence in the image below.

4. Wearing the high voltage “0” rated gloves and leather protectors, reinstall the two main fuses.

5. Replace both access panel gaskets and reinstall the access panels. Reinstall the 14 lock washers and nuts. Torque to 44-53 in-lb (5-6 N•m).

1 2 3 4

Main Fuses

8

High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-

6. Install the two lock washers and security screws. Torque to 44-53 in-lb (5-6 N•m).

7. Install the 4-Battery PEC to the vehicle using proper equipment and safety procedures.Note: The weight of the 4-Battery PEC is 513 lbs (230 kg).

8. Using a 17 mm socket, install the eight OEM supplied mounting bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. Torque fasteners to 43-48 ft-lb (32.5-36.6 N•m).

9. Connect the OEM supplied Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector onto the 4-Battery PEC.

10. Wearing the high voltage “0” rated gloves and leather protectors, install the High-Voltage DC Connector to the Inverter and lock it into place.

11. Reassemble the cooling pipes.

12. Pull out the red PEC Service Switch to the “On” position.

13. Start vehicle when appropriate.

AccessPanels

Access Panel Security Screws

9

Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications

Eaton Tools

• Visit www.Roadranger.com

SPX/OTC Tools

• Contact SPX / OTC at (800) 328-6657

Tool Description

ServiceRanger version 3 ServiceRanger PC based Diagnostic Tool

Tool Description

J-49818 Eaton Hybrid Tool Safety Kit - Basic PPE (Items listed below can be ordered separately)

J-48603 High-Voltage Gloves w/leather protectors (1000 volt)

J-48605 Hybrid Safety Cones (set of 4)

Tool Description

J-49819 Eaton Hybrid Tool Safety Kit - Basic Plus PPE (Items listed below can be ordered separately)

J-48603 High-Voltage Gloves w/leather protectors (1000 volt)

J-48605 Hybrid Safety Cones (set of 4)

J-48907 Orange Magnetic Sign

J-48608 Hybrid Non-Conductive Safety Pole

J-48908 Glove Bag

10

Eaton Tools Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications

J-48893 - Hybrid PPE / Service Tool Kit (includes J-49819 kit and items from Miscellaneous Service Tools highlighted with *)

Service Publications

• Visit www.Roadranger.com

Tool Description

Misc. Service Tools Items listed below are ordered separately

J-48624 Nexiq USB-Link Communication Adapter

J-43318-A* Pin Adapter Kit - Interface Harness Diagnostics

J-48735* Alignment Pins - Hybrid Motor/Gen to Transmission Main Case

J-49111* Clutch Alignment Tool

J-46708* Fluke Digital Multimeter

J-48505 Input Shaft Turning Socket

J-48507 Lifting Fixture - Power Electronics Carrier

J-48502 Jack Adapter Plate - Hybrid Drive Unit

5019 Transmission Jack - Low Lift

5078 Transmission Jack - High Lift

J-48577 Engine/Transmission Stand Adapter Plate - Hybrid Drive Unit

J-29109-A Engine/Transmission Stand - 6000 lb. Rating

TRSM2000 Service Manual (covers external components on transmission and Hybrid components)

TRSM0110 Service Manual (covers internal transmission repairs only)

TRTS2500 Troubleshooting Guide

TRDR1000 Driver Instructions

TRDR1110 First Responder Guide

11

Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure

Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure

Key ON

Retrieve Active Faultswith ServiceRanger.

Active Codes YesGo to "Fault Code Isolation Procedure

Index"

No

Does Gear DisplayShow an "N"

Does Engine Crank

No

Yes

NoGo to "Engine CrankTest"

YesIf equipped, doesvehicle operatenormal in ePTO

mode?

NoGo to "ePTO Test”

YesIf a mode other than neutral is selected doestransmission engage a gear? NOTE: ServiceBrake must be applied prior to selecting a

gear.

No

Go to "Gear Engagement Testif solid “N” is displayed

Go to “Front Box Test” is flashing gear number is displayed

Yes

Is vehicle accelerationperformance acceptableNo

Go to "HybridPerformance Test"

Yes

Clear faults andoperate vehicle based

on customersconcern

Inactive Faults = Goto "Product

Diagnostic Mode"

Active Faults = Go to"Fault Isolation

Procedure Index"

No Fault = TestComplete

Is Red "Stop Hybrid" orAmber “Check Hybrid”lamp blinking? Yes

No

Go to Hybrid LampGear Display Description

Go to Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display description

Go to “Gear EngagementTest”

Will vehicle move from a stop?

Yes

No

12

Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure

13

Hybrid Component & Connector Locations

Transmission Wiring Connections

Hybrid Control Module (HCM)Left: 38-Way System ConnectorRight: 38-Way Vehicle Connector

Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU)Left: 38-Way Vehicle ConnectorRight: 38-Way System Connector

Electronic Clutch ActuatorTop: 3-Way ConnectorBottom: 8-Way Connector

Output Shaft Speed Sensor

Rail Position Sensor

14

Transmission Wiring Connections Hybrid Component & Connector Locations

Gear Position SensorHigh-Voltage 3-Way AC Connector

Motor/Generator Resolver Connector

Motor/Generator Temperature Connector

Input Shaft Speed Sensor

Transmission Diagnostic Port

15

Hybrid Component & Connector Locations Component Wiring Connections

Component Wiring Connections

24V DC(-)

High Voltage DC Connector Top: DC(-) Bottom: (DC(+)

Test Port Connection(Not used)

OEM Connection

DC/DC Converter

HIgh Voltage 3-Way AC Connector

Low Voltage 40-Way Connector High-Voltage DC Connector to PEC

Inverter

Coolant Ports

24V DC(+)

(-) (+)

Coolant Port Inlet

Coolant Port Outlet

16

Component Wiring Connections Hybrid Component & Connector Locations

Air Filter Cover Wing Nuts

Exhaust Duct

PEC Service Switch Access Panel Covers

Access Panel Security Screws

Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector

Top Cover

Air Filter Cover

High-Voltage DC Connector to Inverter

Air Outlet

Access Panel (On side not shown)

Cooling Pipes

8 Mounting Holes (Mounting hardware supplied by OEM)

Cover Bolts

Lifting Eyes

Power Electronics Carrier (PEC)

Cover Security Screws

17

Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing

All Eaton® Hybrid systems require the use of ServiceRanger for all diagnostics. To view fault codes or clear them follow the procedures below.

View Active and Inactive Faults

1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Go to the Tools menu and select the “Communication” tab.

3. Select the appropriate communication device for J1587 and J1939.

4. Select “Connect” on the main page.

5. Select the “View Fault Codes” tab.Note: Initial use requires all steps, however subsequent uses require only steps 4 and 5.

Clear Inactive Faults

1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Go to the Tools menu and select the “Communication” tab.

3. Select the appropriate communication device for J1587 and J1939.

4. Select “Connect” on the main page.

5. Select the “View Fault Codes” tab.

6. Select the “Clear Faults” button.

Note: Initial use requires all steps, however subsequent uses require only steps 4 and 5.

18

Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing

19

Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index

Index

Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number

1 520225 0,6,15 Motor/Generator Current Sensor page 41

2 520226 3 Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor

page 47

3 520227 0 Motor/Generator Temperature page 53

4 520228 0,2, 21-27 Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor

page 61

5 520229 21-29 Motor/Generator AC Cable page 67

6 629 13 No ECU Operation (HCM) page 75

7 629 13 Improper ECU Configuration (HCM)

page 77

8 158 4 Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM)

page 79

9 168 14 Weak Battery Voltage (HCM) page 83

10 168 4 Low Battery Voltage (HCM) page 87

11 629 12 No ECU Operation (TECU) page 91

12 629 13 Improper ECU Configuration (TECU)

page 93

14 751 2, 3, 4 Invalid Shifter Range page 95

16 625 2 High Integrity Link (HIL) page 99

17 626 3, 4 Start Enable Relay page 105

18 520200 2, 9 ECA Communication page 111

19 520273 2, 9 CAN ECA Message page 115

22 563 2, 9, 14 J1939 ABS Message (HCM) page 119

24 525 9 J1939 HCM Message (TECU) page 123

26 522 10 Clutch Slip page 127

27 788 7, 14 Clutch Disengagement page 131

32 43 2 Loss of Switched Ignition Power (TECU)

page 135

33 168 4 Low Battery Voltage (TECU) page 139

34 168 14 Weak Battery Voltage (TECU) page 143

35 639 2 J1939 Communication Link page 147

36 639 14 J1939 Engine Message (TECU) page 153

37 610 5 Power Supply (TECU) page 155

38 520243 3, 4, 5, 14 Battery Fan Relay page 161

39 520247 3, 4, 5 Heat Exchanger Relay page 167

40 520248 3, 4, 5, 14 Cooling Pump Relay page 173

48 523 2, 9 J1939 Transmission Message (HCM)

page 179

49 190 2, 9 J1939 Engine Message (HCM) page 183

20

Index Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index

50 701 2, 9 J1939 Body Controller Message (HCM)

page 185

51 60 2, 3, 4, 10 Rail Position Sensor page 187

52 59 2, 3, 4 Gear Position Sensor page 191

56 161 2,3,4, 5,10 Input Shaft Speed Sensor page 197

58 191 2, 3, 4, 5 Output Shaft Speed Sensor page 201

59 639 2, 9 J1939 Communication Link (HCM)

page 205

60 625 2, 9 CAN Communication Link (HCM) page 211

61 772 5, 6 Rail Select Motor page 215

63 773 5, 6 Gear Select Motor page 219

64 788, 520198, 520199, 524035

0, 12, 13, 21-28

ECA page 223

65 520203 2, 5 ECA Speed Sensor page 227

66 520271 3, 4, 14 ECA Battery Voltage page 233

67 520274 3, 4, 5 ECA Ignition Voltage page 237

68 520231 12, 13, 14 Grade Sensor page 243

70 188, 518, 539, 544 0, 1, 2, 7 Engine Failed to Respond (HCM) page 247

71 520275 7 Failed to Disengage Gear page 249

72 520277 7 Failed to Select Rail page 253

73 520278 7 Failed to Engage Gear page 257

74 93, 190 7 Engine Failed to Respond (TECU)

page 261

75* 520276 14 Power Down In Gear page 263

76 520250 3, 4, 16,18 High-Voltage Battery Potential Voltage

page 265

78 520232 6 High-Voltage Battery Current page 269

82 520233 0,16 High-Voltage Battery Temperature

page 273

83 751 12, 13 Invalid Shifter Range page 279

84 751 13 Shift Control Device Not Configured

page 285

85 639 12 Shift Control Device Incompatible page 293

88 520223 2, 9 Inverter CAN Message (HCM) page 299

89 520234 2, 9 BCU CAN Message (HCM) page 303

95 520249 3, 4 24-volt Cranking Relay page 309

101 520238 0, 22-31 High-Voltage Battery page 315

103 520265 22-26 Battery Control Unit Communication

page 319

105 520240 22-30 Battery Control Unit page 325

107 520242 1 High-Voltage Battery Leak Detection

page 331

108 520268 3, 4 Battery Control Unit Power Supply

page 347

Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number

21

Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index Index

110 520220 21-29 Inverter page 353

111 520260 12 - 28 Inverter Communication page 357

112 520221 3, 4 Inverter Voltage page 363

113 520222 6, 14 Inverter Current page 369

114 520261 3, 4 Inverter Power Supply page 375

115 520223 0 Inverter Temperature page 381

116 521210, 521211, 521212

3, 4, 5 High-Voltage Relays page 387

116 520224 10, 14, 20 High-Voltage Relays page 395

117 520251 3, 14, 29 BCU Relay Cut Request page 405

Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number

22

Index Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index

23

Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index

Index

Symptom Isolation Procedure Page Number

Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows a “-”

Front Box Test page 413

Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows a “N”

Engine Crank Test page 419

Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows “--”, “**”, or blank

Power Up Sequence Test page 29

Power-up vehicle cranks and Gear Display shows “--”, “**”, or blank

Refer to OEM for gear display issue

Vehicle acceleration performance is not acceptable

Hybrid Performance Test page 423

Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral and warning tone sounds (solid “N” in gear display)

Gear Engagement Test page 427

Transmission will not move from a stop (solid gear number in gear display)

Gear Engagement Test page 427

Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral (flashing gear number in gear display)

Front Box Test page 413

Red “Service” lamp on the push button shift control is on/blinking

Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17

Amber “Check Hybrid” lamp on the dash is on Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17

Red “Stop Hybrid” lamp on the dash is on Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17

24

Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index

25

Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM)

Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) is used to help diagnose inactive codes that may have been set during normal driving. This diagnostic mode increases the sensitivity of the fault sensing capabilities.

This procedure tests loose, degraded, and intermittent connections. Use the active fault isolation procedure to guide you to the wiring and connectors that are associated with the inactive fault codes. Flex the wiring harness and connectors and attempt to recreate the fault after activating (PDM).

PDM is only to be used by a trained service technician in an authorized dealer.

To enter PDM mode

Note: The vehicle will not start in Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM). You must turn vehicle key “OFF” and allow the system to power down to exit PDM.

1. Vehicle must be stationary, engine must not be running, vehicle parking brake must be set.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

3. Select the “View Fault Codes” screen.

4. Perform two key clicks of the ignition switch starting in the “ON” position and ending in the “ON” position

Note: An “88” may show up in the dash at key on, which is a normal power-up test of the display.

5. The gear display will flash a solid “PD” (Product Diagnostic Mode) and the mode will be activated.

6. Flex the wiring harness and connectors and attempt to recreate the fault.

7. If a fault becomes active during PDM, ServiceRanger will display the fault with a status of active.

8. If a fault is detected, exit PDM mode and perform the corresponding “Fault Isolation Procedure” page 11.

Note: Active codes set during PDM mode will not be stored as inactive.

9. To exit PDM mode, power the system down by turning the key to the “OFF” position.

PDM will only work with the following inactive codes

9, 10, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 22, 24, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 56, 58, 59, 60, 61, 63, 76, 87, 88, 89, 95

26

Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) is used to help diagnose inactive codes that may have

27

Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions

All Eaton® Hybrid systems use a combination of three lamps to indicate failures of different operating systems and the ability of the vehicle to drive. These lamps include the red “Service” lamp, amber “Check Hybrid” lamp, and the red “Stop Hybrid” lamp. The details for each lamp are included below.

Red “Service” Lamp

1. This lamp is located on the Push Button Shift Control and reads “SERVICE.”

2. This lamp is turned on and off by the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) for Automated Transmissions faults over the High Integrity Link (HIL).

3. This lamp also comes on momentarily at key on then goes out as part of the TECU self-test.

Amber “Check Hybrid” Lamp

1. This lamp is located near the middle of the dash. The lamp is amber and contains wording below stating “Check Hybrid.”

2. This lamp is turned on and off indirectly by the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and directly by the Body Controller over J1939.

3. This lamp is turned on when a Hybrid system fault is active.

4. When the amber lamp is on, the vehicle can still be driven, however, the vehicle may operate without Hybrid electric assist.

Red “Stop Hybrid” Lamp

1. This lamp is located near the middle of the dash. The lamp is red and contains wording below stating “Stop Hybrid.”

2. This lamp is turned on and off indirectly by the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and directly by the Body Controller over J1939.

3. This lamp is turned on when a Hybrid system fault is active.

4. When the red lamp is on, the vehicle should not be driven. Have the vehicle towed or trailered to the OEM truck dealership.

Blinking amber “Check Hybrid” Lamp

1. The majority of vehicles have a red stop switch on the front of the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC). If this switch is pushed in, the amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will blink. To reset, pull the switch out and turn the key off for 2 minutes. If the lamp remains on, go to the “Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure on page 11 and start with step 3 “Retrieve Active Faults with ServiceRanger”. You should have an active Fault Code 76 FMI 4, or Fault Code 116, FMI 10. Continue to the diagnostic test for the fault that is currently active.

“ST” in Gear Display

1. A “ST” in the gear display indicates a driver trigger Snapshot was recorded. Snapshot is a diagnostic tool that is used to capture specific data at the time of a fault. It is triggered through two different means listed below.a. Fault code triggered - Specific faults will trigger the HCM or TECU to capture a Snapshot

file for later retrieval. This method will not display and “ST” in the gear display.b. Driver triggered - If the driver chooses to capture a Snapshot of an event he needs to

decide if he wants TECU or HCM data. To capture a TECU Snapshot select, “Low” and the up button twice. To capture a HCM Snapshot select, “Drive” or “Low” and the up button and the down button.

28

Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions

“PD” in Gear Display

1. A “PD” in the gear display indicates the TECU and HCM are in a special diagnostic mode called Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM). For more details on the mode and its operation see the Product Diagnostic Mode on page 25.

“CA” in Gear Display

1. A “CA” in the gear display indicates the HCM is detecting a clutch abuse situation. If the vehicle detects a clutch abuse situation it will first tone the Push Button Shift Control and flash a “CA” in the gear display. If the clutch abuse situation continues, the Hybrid system will only allow an electric only launch in addition to continuing the tone and the “CA”. If the clutch abuse continues, while driving the Hybrid system will open the clutch once vehicle speed is below 5mph and allow the clutch to cool.

“OS” in Gear Display

1. A “OS” in the gear display indicates the HCM is detecting a motor overspeed situation. The vehicle will upshift in Drive and Low automatically, however, if the user is in Manual they perform the upshift unless the vehicle is close to the motor overspeed. If the vehicle is descending a long steep grade in top gear, the driver may see an “OS” indicating he needs to depress the service brake pedal to slow the vehicle. The HCM will normally shift the vehicle or reduce torque to prevent the motor from going overspeed.

“F” in Gear Display

1. A “F” in the gear display indicates the TECU has detected an active fault. This fault can be accessed with ServiceRanger. See the Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index starting on page 19.

“-” in Gear Display

1. A “-” in the gear display indicates the transmission is stuck in gear. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23.

“**” in Gear Display

1. A “**” in the gear display indicates the gear display has power but no communication on the data link. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23.

“- -” in Gear Display

1. A “- -” in the gear display indicates the gear display has power, and there is no communication present on the data link, or the TECU isn’t communicating with the display. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23.

Blank Gear Display

1. A Blank gear display indicates the display has lost power, or the TECU isn’t communicating with the gear display. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23.

29

Power-Up Sequence Test

Overview

This test must be performed only if you experience a “vehicle won’t crank” with a “- -”, “**”, or blank gear display. You must perform the Electrical Pretest prior to this procedure.

Possible Causes

• TECU Power Supply• TECU

Fallback Mode

There is no fallback for this concern and the vehicle will not crank if the TECU or power supply harness has failed.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Battery Load Tester• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform the Electrical Pretest

2. Is concern still present after the Electrical Pretest.

Yes Replace the TECU. Return to the Diagnostic Procedure.

No Test Complete. Return to the Diagnostic Procedure.

30

Overview Power-Up Sequence Test

31

Electrical Pretest

Overview

This test must be performed prior to diagnosing select Hybrid faults. This test verifies the quality of the standard battery system and the main power and ground supplies to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM), Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU), and Electronic Clutch Actuator (ECA).

Note: This test will be called out in the procedures where it is required.

Possible Causes

• Low-voltage can be caused by the following:• Low batteries• Charging system

• Power harness connections or fuses to TECU, HCM, or ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

A weak power supply can cause many issues such as shift performance, power-up or failure to crank.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Battery Load Tester• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

32

Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic Electrical Pretest

Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic

ABC

ECA - 3-Way Connector

H

Battery

38

Plus (+)

B

HCM

HCM Power (Vehicle)

36

ECA

ECA PowerC

ECA Ground

Neg (-)

Clutch Ignition (System)

Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

ECA -Pack 8-Way Connector

E

A B C D

H G F

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

HCM Ground (Vehicle)

TECU

TECU Ground 36

35

38

TECU Ignition

TECU Power

13

Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

35HCM Ignition (Vehicle)

Ignition Relay

87

33

Electrical Pretest Electrical Pretest Procedures

Electrical Pretest Procedures

Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Inspect starter/battery and in line fuse holder connections on Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), Hybrid Control Module (HCM), and Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) for integrity.

Note: ECA, HCM, and TECU use a 30 amp fuse. Refer to OEM for locations

3. Measure voltage across batteries.

If voltage is 23 to 25 volts on a 24-volt system

Proceed with battery load test. Repair or replace batteries as required. Go to STEP B

If voltage is outside of range Repair or replace batteries and charging system as required. Repeat this step.

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab.

3. Select the “Data Monitor” option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (clutch actuator) list.

If PID 132 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 160 reads “1”

Go to STEP C

a. PID 132 “Clutch Actuator Battery Voltage.”

b. PID 160 “Clutch Actuator Ignition Switch Status.”

If either voltage is out of range Repair main power or ignition supply to the ECA. Repeat this step.

Note: If the clutch parameters can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the ECA with a voltmeter

34

Electrical Pretest Procedures Electrical Pretest

Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued

Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Select the “Data Monitor” option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (Hybrid Control Module) list.

a. PID 165 “Battery Potential Voltage”

b. PID 166 “Ignition Switch Status.”

If PID 165 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 166 reads “1”

Go to STEP D

Note: If the Battery Potential Voltage or Ignition Switch Status can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the HCM with a voltmeter.

If either voltage is out of range Repair the main power or ignition supply to the HCM. Repeat this step.

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Select the “Data Monitor” option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (Transmission) list.

a. PID 168 “Battery Potential Voltage.”

b. PID 158 “Battery Potential Voltage Switched.”

If PID 168 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 158 is within 0.6 volts of ignition voltage

Test complete. Return to the Fault or Symptom procedure that directed you to this step.

Note: If the Battery Potential Voltage or Battery Potential Voltage Switched can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the TECU with a voltmeter.

If either voltage is out of range Repair main power or ignition supply to the TECU. Repeat this step.

35

Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Overview

This test must be performed prior to diagnosing select Hybrid faults. This test verifies the power supply for the Inverter and Battery Control Unit (BCU).

Note: You must perform the Electrical Pretest before the Hybrid Electrical Pretest.

Note: This test will be called out in the procedures where it is required.

Possible Causes

• Low-voltage can be caused by the following:• Power harness connections from Inverter or BCU.

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

Loss of ignition power will cause the Hybrid system to be inoperable. The vehicle will run under diesel power only.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603• Battery Load Tester• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

36

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic

Inverter Chassis Ground 1

Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

3 4 5

6

7 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

17

18

19

6

7

6

PEC

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

7

9

14

25 GND-BC2

Relay Box Enable

Inverter Enable

Chassis Ground 2 HCM (Pin 2)

DC/DC Converter 4-Way OEM Connector

4 3

1 2

DC/DC Converter

4

Ground

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Relay Box Enable 2

GND_BC

24

15

37

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform the Electrical Pretest then continue to step two.

2. Key off.

! WARNINGFollow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

4. Measure resistance from pin 6 to battery negative and then from pin 7 to battery negative.

If resistance is 0 to 0.3 ohms from pin 6 to battery negative and from pin 7 to battery negative

Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Inverter ground harness. Repeat this step.

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Connect a multi meter to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 and pin 6.

2. Key on.

3. Observe multi meter voltage reading.

If voltage is 23 to 25 volts Go to STEP C

If voltage is outside of range Repair the harness from the HCM. Repeat this step.

38

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures Hybrid Electrical Pretest

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

3. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector.

4. Measure resistance from PEC pin 7 to battery negative.

If resistance from pin 7 to battery negative is 0 to 0.3 ohms

Go to STEP D

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Inverter to PEC ground wire. Repeat this step.

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Connect a multi meter to the PEC 19-way connector pins 6 and pin 7.

2. Key on.

3. Observe multi meter voltage reading.

If voltage is 23 to 25 volts If vehicle has ePTO feature on Push Button go to STEP E.

If vehicle does not have ePTO feature test complete. Reconnect PEC 19-way connector. Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19.

4. If voltage is outside of range Repair the power supply harness from the Inverter. Repeat this step.

39

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect PEC 19-way connector.

3. Disconnect DC/DC Converter 4-way connector.

4. Measure resistance from DC/DC Converter 4-way connector pin 4 to battery negative.

If resistance between pin 4 and battery negative is 0 to 0.3 ohms

Test Complete. Reconnect the 4-way connector. Return to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19.

If resistance is outside of range Repair the ground harness from the DC/DC Converter to battery negative. Repeat this step.

40

Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures Hybrid Electrical Pretest

41

Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures

Motor/Generator Current Sensor Fault

SA 239

SPN 520225

FMI 0, 6, 15

Overview

The high-voltage Motor/Generator assembly is connected to the Inverter assembly through an AC high-voltage cable that contains three separate cables. During operation the Inverter monitors the amperage in the AC cables through a current sensor, which is mounted inside the Inverter. The inductive sensor produces an output based on amperage present in the cables.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 6 is set when Inverter detects current input from the Motor/Generator greater than 100 amps for 150 ms

• FMI 0 is set when the Inverter detects current input from the Motor/Generator greater than 200 amps for 0.3 ms.

• FMI 15 is set when the sensor offset is out of range at initial check.

Possible Causes

• FMI 0,6 • Inverter• Motor/Generator • AC Cable

• FMI 15- Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 1 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory.• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

42

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603

• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708

• ServiceRanger

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

43

Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

W U

V

E D

F

W

V

U

W

V

U

Inverter Motor/Generator

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

U

V

WF

E D

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

44

Fault Procedures Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures

Fault Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. Remove the AC cable from the Motor/Generator and Inverter

5. Measure resistance of each circuit in the AC high-voltage cable:

• U-U• V-V• W-W

If resistance for each circuit is less than 1 ohm

Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V

If FMI 15 is active Replace the Inverter. Go toSTEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance of each circuit to ground in the AC high-voltage cable.

If resistance between each circuit and ground is 5M ohms or greater

Go to STEP C

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V

45

Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Fault Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure the resistance between the following AC high-voltage cable pins:

If resistance of each phase is 5M or greater

Go to STEP D

• U-U• V-V• W-W

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance of each Motor/Generator phase at the following pins:

If resistance of each phase is less than 10 ohms

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

• U-U• V-V• W-W

If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. Go to Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. Go to Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 1 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 1 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index on page 19

46

Fault Procedures Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures

47

Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures

Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor Fault

SA 239

SPN 520226

FMI 3

Overview

The Motor/Generator temperature sensor is a thermistor located inside the Motor/Generator that changes in value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Motor/Generator temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.2 volts equals 280°C or 536°F). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.1 volts equals 0°C or 32°F).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the sensor voltage is greater than 4.1 volts for 10 seconds, while the Inverter temperature is over 35° C or 95°F, or if the sensor output voltage is less than 0.2 volts for 10 seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3 - Motor/Generator - Short/open temperature sensor wires between the Motor/Generator and the

Inverter- Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 2 is set the following conditions will occur:• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory• High-voltage Motor/Generator assist is available, but at a reduced amount

Conditions to Clear Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

48

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

49

Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

36

37

2

1

Inverter Motor/GeneratorTemperature Sensor

TM Ground

TM

Temp Sensor

Temp Sensor

OTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Location

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

Terminal Side - Harness ConnectorTemperature Sensor

(Deutsch 2-pin connector)

50

Fault Code Procedures Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures

Fault Code Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. Disconnect the Temperature Sensor connector at the Motor/Generator.

5. Measure resistance at the Motor/Generator 2-way Temperature Sensor connector from pin 1 to pin 2.

If resistance is 0.8K ohms to 301.7K ohms

Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

WARNING

51

Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Fault Code Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key Off.

2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

3. Reconnect the Motor/Generator 2-way temperature sensor connector.

4. Measure resistance at the following:

a. Inverter 40-way connector pin 37 to pin 36.

b. Inverter 40-way connector pin 37 to ground.

If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms between pin 37 and pin 36 and resistance between pin 37 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V.

If resistance is outside of range Repair the open or short to ground in the harness between the Inverter 40-way connector and the Motor/Generator 2-way connector. Go to STEP V.

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 2 appears Return to STEP A to find the error in testing.

If code other than 2 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19

52

Fault Code Procedures Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures

53

Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures

Motor/Generator Temperature Fault

SA 239

SPN 520227

FMI 0

Overview

The Motor/Generator temperature is measured through a thermistor style sensor, which is located internal to the unit. The sensor changes value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Motor/Generator temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.2 volts equals 280°C or 536°F). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.1 volts equals 0°C or 32°F).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 0 is set when the temperature sensor value is greater than 185°C or 365°F for 1 second.

Possible Causes

• FMI 0 - Motor/Generator - Inverter- Liquid cooling system (low coolant, no coolant flow, coolant pump, radiator,

radiator fan, reservoir)

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 3 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

54

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

55

Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

36

37

2

1

Inverter Motor/GeneratorTemperature Sensor

TM Ground

TM

Temp Sensor

Temp Sensor

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

Terminal Side - Harness ConnectorTemperature Sensor

(Deutsch 2-pin connector)

56

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

3. Key on

4. Select the Data Monitor option and view PID 113 “Motor/Generator Temperature” in the “Power Electronics” list.

5. Observe PID 113 again after 20 minutes

If PID 113 “Motor/Generator Temperature” dropped from the first reading

Go to STEP B

If PID 113 “Motor/Generator Temperature” remained the same

Go to STEP H

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Observe the coolant level after the system has cooled down to ensure if is filled to the proper level

If coolant is within the recommended limits

Go to STEP C

If coolant is below the recommended limits

Refer to the OEM for coolant type and fill procedures. Check for source of coolant leak. When refilling the system it should be pressurized or vacuum bleed of air to ensure the coolant will flow properly during normal operation.

WARNING

57

Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Visually inspect the Hybrid liquid cooling system radiator for debris, obstruction to airflow, or sharp bends in the coolant lines

If the radiator is free of debris and the coolant lines are not bent sharply

Go to STEP D

If the radiator has debris, the air flow is obstructed, or the coolants lines are bent sharply

Repair the concern. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin connector in the cab.

3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Cooling Pump” option.

4. Enable the “Cooling Pump” option

If the coolant pump turns on Go to STEP E

If the coolant pump does not turn on

Go to STEP F

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Heat Exchanger Fan” option

2. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option

If the heat exchanger fan turns on The system needs to be purged of air to allow the coolant to flow. Bleed the air by using a coolant system pressurizing tool or a vacuum tool. Go to STEP V

If the heat exchanger fan does not turn on

Go to STEP G

58

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Disconnect the Coolant Pump 2-way connector

3. Select the Advanced Products Function option and select “Cooling Pump.”

4. Enable the Cooling Pump option.

5. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B.

If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump concern.

If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range

Refer to OEM for repair procedures on Cooling Pump power harness or damaged fuse.

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Disconnect the Heat Exchanger Fan 2-way connector.

3. Select the Advanced Products Function option and select the “Heat Exchanger Fan.”

4. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option.

5. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B.

If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan concern.

If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range

Refer to OEM for repair procedures on Heat Exchanger Fan power harness or damaged fuse.

59

Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector

3. Measure resistance between pins 36 and 37, and pin 37 to ground of the Inverter 40-way connector

If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms between pin 37 and pin 36 and resistance between pin 37 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside the range Go to STEP I

STEP I

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor 2-way connector located on the right side of the Motor/Generator

3. Measure resistance between the 2-way Temperature sensor connector from pin 1 to pin 2

If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms

Repair the shorted HCM system harness between the Inverter 40-way connector and Motor/Generator 2-way connector.

If resistance is outside the range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

60

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 3 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 3 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

61

Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures

Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor Fault

SA 239

SPN 520228

FMI 0, 2, 21-27

Overview

The Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor is mounted to the back of the Motor/Generator around the input shaft. The sensor is a two piece design with the rotor being mounted to the input shaft and the sensing ring being mounted to the motor housing. The sensing ring is supplied with low-voltage during operation. When the rotor turns it induces a voltage fluctuation into the sensing ring, which is then converted into a digital signal for Motor/Generator RPM. Voltage output and frequency is low at idle and increases with RPM.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverters ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• FMI 2 will not run if there is an active Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor fault.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 0 is set when the Motor/Generator speed exceeds the normal allowable range.• FMI 2 is set when the Motor/Generator speed is different than Transmission Input Shaft Speed

by more than 100 RPM for at least 10 seconds.• FMI 21 is set when a resolver signal line short to 24-volt or ground is detected.• FMI 22,24,25 are set when the combination of the analog-to-digital converter signals is a

mismatch• FMI 27 is set when the Inverter detects and error in the initial check• FMI 23 is set when there is an analog-to-digital converter output error signal for 100ms• FMI 26 is set when the rotation sensor speed is greater than 6000 min-1 for 10 ms

Possible Causes

• FMI 0- Long extended grades may require intermittent use of the service brakes to slow

the vehicle• FMI 21

- Inverter- Resolver Harness between the Motor/Generator and Inverter

• FMI 22,24,25,27- Inverter

• FMI 2,23,26- Inverter- Motor/Generator

- Resolver Harness between the Motor/Generator and Inverter

62

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 4 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

63

Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Connector Views

40

30

3

4

Inverter

Motor/GeneratorResolver

REZ_Minus

REZ_Plus

38

28

1

2

39

29

5

6REZ_S2

REZ_S4

REZ_S1

REZ_S3 Resolver

Resolver

Resolver

Resolver

Resolver

Resolver

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Terminal Side - Harness ConnectorResolver

(Deutsch 6-pin connector)

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

64

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. What FMI’s are present. If FMI 22,24,25, or 27 are listed Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If FMI 2,23, or 26 are listed Go to STEP B

If FMI 21 is listed Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 40-way low-voltage connector at the Inverter.

2. Measure Resolver resistance at the 40-pin harness connector between the following pins:

• 30 - 40• 28 - 38• 29 - 39

If resistance for the following pins are:

• Pin 30-40 is 10.5 to 8.6 ohms

• Pin 28-38 is 34 to 28 ohms

• Pin 29-39 is 27 to 23 ohms

If FMI 2 is active contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357). If FMI 26 or 23 are active replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range for any of the readings

Go to STEP C

WARNING

65

Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 6-way Motor/Generator resolver connector.

2. Measure the Resolver resistance at the 6-pin harness connector between the following pins:

• 3-4• 1-2• 5-6

Note: An auto-ranging digital volt/ ohm meter must be used.

If resistance for the following pins are:

• Pin 3-4 is 10.5 to 8.6 ohms

• Pin 1-2 is 34 to 28 ohms

• Pin 5-6 is 27 to 23 ohms

Repair the open harness between the Inverter 40-pin connector and the Motor/Generator 6-pin Resolver connector. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 40-way connector at the inverter

2. Use an ohm meter to measure a short to both ground and vehicle battery 24 volt on the following pins

• 28• 29• 38

• 39

Note: An auto-ranging digital volt/ ohm meter must be used.

If there is continuity at any of the following pins:

• Pin 28• Pin 29• Pin 38

• Pin 39

Repair resolver vehicle harness between the Inverter and Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

If meter reads Open or OL Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

66

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 4 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 4 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

67

Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures

Motor/Generator AC Cable Fault

SA 239

SPN 520229

FMI 21-29

Overview

The Motor/Generator AC cables are connected from the Motor/Generator to the Inverter. These cables carry up to 500 volts AC 3 phase when the vehicle is in operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverters ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• FMI 25-27 require the Motor/Generator RPM to be greater than 500 RPM.• FMI 28 requires the Motor/Generator RPM to be less than 500 RPM.• FMI 29 requires the Motor/Generator RPM to be less than 50 RPM.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 21 is set when the AC interlock circuit is open.• FMI 22,23,24 are set when the 2 phase motor current is more than 360 amps for 0.9 ms. • FMI 25,26,27 are set when the Inverter detects a single open wire and motor current is less

than 8 amps for 200ms at speeds >= 500 RPM and current command from the Inverter is > 20 amps.

• FMI 28 is set when Motor/Generator current is less than 8A for 200ms at Speed < |500RPM| and current command > 20A(rms).

• FMI 29 is set during initialization, the Inverter checks if the AC cable is connected between the Motor and Inverter by sending out 20A for 200ms and checking the feedback.

Possible Causes

• FMI 21- AC Cable Interlock

• FMI 22,23,24 - Inverter - Motor/Generator - AC Cable

• FMI 25,26,27,28,29 - Motor/Generator- AC Cable

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 5 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory.• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off.• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode.

68

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures

• If FMI 28, or 29 is present at power-up, the vehicle will not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

69

Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

W U

V

E D

F

W

V

U

W

V

U

Inverter Motor/Generator

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Location

High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

U

V

WF

E D

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

70

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. What faults are present If Fault Code 5 FMI 21 is active Go to STEP E

If Fault Code 5 FMI 22, 23, or 24 are active

Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 5 FMI 25, 26, 27, 28, or 29 are active

Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove the AC high-voltage cable at the Motor/Generator and Inverter.

3. Measure the resistance between the following AC Cable pins:

• U - V• V - W• W - U

If resistance between each phase is 5M ohms or greater

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

71

Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter and Motor/Generator.

2. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins:

• U - U• V - V• W - W

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If the resistance of each circuit is 1 ohm or less

Go to STEP D

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins:

• U - V• V - W• W - U

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If the resistance of each phase is 10 ohms or less

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

72

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Check the AC cable connectors at the Motor/Gen and Inverter to ensure they are properly connected

If connections are loose or not properly connected

Reconnect AC Cables to component. Go to STEP V

If connections are not loose and are properly connected

Go to STEP F

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the AC cable from the motor/generator and inverter.

2. Measure the interlock circuit resistance from the Inverter connector and the Motor/Generator connector at the following pins:

• D - D• E - E

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If the resistance is 0 - 0.3 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC cable between the Inverter and Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

73

Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 5 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 5 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

74

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures

75

Fault Code 6 Isolation Procedures

No ECU Operation Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 629

FMI 14

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 14 is set when HCM can not complete the write of EEPROM during shut down.

Possible Causes

• FMI 14

- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 6 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display if the HCM sets the fault after power-up.• If the fault occurs at power-up the vehicle may not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

76

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 6 Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 6 is active Replace Hybrid Control Module (HCM) (Only when fault code is active).

If code 6 is inactive Test complete.

77

Fault Code 7 Isolation Procedures

Improper ECU Configuration Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 629

FMI 13

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 13 is set at key on if the HCM data is not read from memory within 1 second.

Possible Causes

• FMI 13

- Improper ECU configuration software

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 7 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

78

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 7 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Turn ignition off for 2 seconds.

3. Key on.

4. Is fault code 7 active If code 7 is active Replace the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) (only if the fault codes are active)

If code 7 is inactive Test complete.

79

Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures

Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 158

FMI 4

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM ignition power is a single 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector.

Conditions to Run Fault

• Output shaft speed must be greater than 0 rpm

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 4 is set when the HCM loses ignition power during operation for 2 seconds or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the “Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM)” page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 4- Ignition power supply to HCM- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 8 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display only if the vehicle is moving.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The red 'Service” lamp will display and an “F’ will flash in the gear display if the fault occurs

prior to power-up.• Fault is stored in Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) memory due to lack of

communication with the HCM.• If the faults occurs while the vehicle is moving, the transmission will remain in place and the

clutch will open when the vehicle comes to an idle. The clutch will close and the vehicle will operate in 1st and reverse from stop.

• If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

80

Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM) Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

HCM

30

86

87 85

87

86

85

30

35 Ignition

Front Harness View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Typical Relay Switch

Ignition Relay

Ground

Vehicle Ignition

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

81

Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest If code 8 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). go to Step V.

If code 8 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Key off.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes

5. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to reset the code

If no codes Test complete.

7. Check for codes If code 8 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 8 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

82

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures

83

Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures

Weak Battery Voltage Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 168

FMI 14

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The HCM System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 14 is set when the HCM battery voltage drops below 9 volts for 10 seconds.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 14 - Power supply harness to the HCM- Low batteries or bad main power connection

- Charging system

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 9 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

84

Connector Views Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

30

Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Typical Relay Switch

Ignition Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

38 VBATT

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

36 HCM Ground

85

Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 9 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace HCM (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V

If code 9 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear codes. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 9 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 9 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

86

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures

87

Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures

Low Battery Voltage Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 168

FMI 4

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 4 is set when the HCM battery voltage drops below 7 volts for more than 1 second.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 4 - Power supply harness to the HCM.- Low batteries or bad main power connection.

- Charging system.

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 10 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

88

Connector Views Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

30

Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Typical Relay Switch

Ignition Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

38 VBATT

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

36 HCM Ground

89

Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 10 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace HCM (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V

If code 10 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear codes. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 10 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 10 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

90

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures

91

Fault Code 11 Isolation Procedures

No ECU Operation Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 629

MID 130

SID 254

FMI 12

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 12 is set if the TECU detects an intermittent failure in the Electronic Shifter position.

Possible Causes

• FMI 12

- Electric Shifter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 11 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red 'Service” lamp will display and an “F’ will flash in the gear display only if the fault occurs after power-up.

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If the fault code occurs after power-up, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the

clutch will open.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

92

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 11 Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 11 is active Replace Electric Shifter (only if fault code is active).

If code 11 is inactive Test complete.

93

Fault Code 12 Isolation Procedures

Improper ECU Configuration Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 629

MID 130

SID 254

FMI 13

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the HCM controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 13 is set when the Gen 3 ECU is not reading valid information from memory, including the transmission table and calibration values within 1 second of power-up.

Possible Causes

• FMI 13 - Improper ECU Configuration Software

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 12 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red 'Service” lamp will display and an “F’ will flash in the gear display • If the fault occurs at power-up the vehicle will not crank

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

94

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 12 Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 12 is active Replace the Transmission ECU (only if the fault code is active).

If code 12 is inactive Test complete.

95

Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures

Invalid Shifter Range

SA 3

SPN 751

SID/PID 18, 19

FMI 2, 3, 4

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift devices are the Eaton® Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the shifter is not returning a valid position (PRNDH1)• FMI 3 is set when the sensor voltage is higher than expected• FMI 4 is set when the sensor voltage is lower than expected

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2 - shifter is in between detent positions or sensor is out of calibration.• FMI 3 - sensor input is shorted high or sensor ground in open• FMI 4 - sensor input is open circuit or shorted to ground

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 14 is set the following conditions will occur:

• A “F” will show in the gear display• Fault is stored in TECU memory• TECU changes to “AutoShift” control• The engine will not crank

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

96

Connector Views Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Park PawlActuator

3

1

4

2

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

17

16

15

31

Shift Return (Minus)

Shift Control Input 1

Shift Control (Plus)

Shift Control Input 2

TECU

2

3

4

1

4-Pin Park Pawl ActuatorConnector

97

Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 4-way connector to the park pawl actuator

2. Key on

3. Check for 24V supply at 4-pin connector at pins 1 and 2

If voltage between pins 1 and 2 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Go to STEP B

If voltage is outside the range Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. With the actuator/shift lever in the Neutral position check voltage on pins:

• 3 to ground• 4 to ground

If voltage is between 2.25V and 2.75 V

Go to STEP C

If voltage is outside the range Replace Sensor. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector

2. Check continuity between:

• 38-way connector pin 15 and 4-pin connector pin 4

• 38-way connector pin 16 and 4-pin connector pin 3

If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V

98

Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector

2. Check continuity between:

• 38-way connector pin 17 and 4-pin connector pin 1

• 38-way connector pin 31 and 4-pin connector pin 2

If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 14 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 14 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

99

Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures

High Integrity Link (HIL) Fault

SA 3

SPN 625

MID 130

SID 248

FMI 2

Overview

The High Integrity Link (HIL) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link that connects the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) to the Push Button Shift Control (PBSC). Each module contains a 120 ohm resistor internally. The link carries information like driver mode selection as well as fault information to light the service lamp.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU Driver Interface Configuration is set to High-Integrity Link (HIL).

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses communication for 5 seconds or more with the PBSC.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2 - HIL data link- PBSC- TECU

- Power supply harness from TECU to PBSC

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 16 is set the following conditions will occur:

• An “F” will show on the gear display.• The Push Button Mode lamp flashes next to the selected mode and the Service lamp will

remain off.• The Push Button lamps will come on and then remain off if the data link fails at power-up.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” Mode.• If the code is active during power-up, the transmission will not engage a gear.

100

Connector Views Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures

• If the fault is active while driving the transmission it will remain in the current gear and then shift into the default gear once the vehicle comes to a stop. The will open at idle and will close if the throttle is depressed. The vehicle will move into the default start gear only.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

Harness Front ViewPush Button Shift Control Connector

ABCDEFGHJK

1

2

3

A1

A3

K1

K3

TECU PBSC

27

28 F1

F2HIL Low

HIL High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

31

25 J3

C1

Shift Power (-)

Shift Power (+)

HIL Low

HIL High

Shift Power (-)

Shift Power (+)

101

Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on and observe the red push button Service lamp.

If the red Service lamp turns on Go to STEP C

If the red Service lamp does not turn on

Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect Shift Control 30-way connector.

2. Key on.

3. Measure voltage on 30-way connector pins J3 and C1

If voltage is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage

Go to STEP C

If out of range Go to STEP D

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the 30-way Push Button Shift Control Connector.

3. Key on.

4. Connect Voltmeter leads to pins F1 and F2.

If the voltage is 0.10 volts AC or greater

Replace Push Button Shift Control (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 10 volts AC).

If the voltage is out of range Go to STEP F

102

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

Note: On Peterbilt units, disconnect Gear Display.

4. Measure resistance between:

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin J3 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 25.

If resistance between pins J3 and 25 is 0 to 0.3 ohms.

Go to STEP E

If any of the above conditions are not met

Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure the resistance between:

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin C1 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 31.

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin C1 and ground.

If resistance between pins C1 and 31 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance between pin C1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If any of the above conditions are not met

Repair harness between the Transmission ECU and Shift Control. Go to STEP V

103

Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between:

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin F1 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 28.

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin F1 and ground.

If resistance between pins F1 and 28 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and if resistance between pin F1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Go to STEP G

If any of the above conditions are not met

Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure resistance between:

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin F2 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 27.

• Shift Control 30-way connector pin F2 and ground.

If resistance between pins F2 and 27 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F2 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If any of the above conditions are not met

Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

104

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 16 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 16 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

105

Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures

Start Enable Relay Fault

SA 3

SPN 626

MID 130

SID 237

FMI 3, 4

Overview

The Start Enable Relay is wired into the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) on the coil side of the relay. At key on, the HCM determines the starting method (High-Voltage Motor/Generator, or Engine Starter) to use. If the HCM decides to use the standard engine starter, the 24-volt Cranking Relay is energized suppling battery power to the Start Enable Relay main feed, which then powers the starter solenoid.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the TECU detects an open or short to the vbatt in the control circuit of the Start Enable Relay for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 4 is set if the TECU detects a short to ground in the control circuit of the Start Enable Relay for 1 second or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3,4 - Loose or corroded connections, bent or burnt pins, short to ground, open, or short

to vbatt on the circuit - Start Enable Relay

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 17 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F’ will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will still crank, provided the high-voltage batteries have

a sufficient State of Charge (SOC).• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to operate.

106

Connector Views Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Front Harness View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

TECU

30

86

87 85

4

32

85

86

Start Enable Relay

Start Enable Minus

Start Enable Plus

Typical Relay Switch

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

107

Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Swap Start Enable Relay with another relay and see if fault returns

If fault does not return with new relay

Replace Start Enable Relay (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. What FMIs were listed from Step A?

If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP C

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4

If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms

Go to STEP D

If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V

108

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground

If the voltage between pin 32 and ground is 5 volts

Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

Note: The voltage will only read 5 volts for 1-2 seconds.

If the voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts

Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Voltage should remain at 5 volts for 1-2 seconds after initial key on. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect battery cable.

3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and ground

If the resistance between 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If the resistance is outside of range

Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

109

Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 17 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 17 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

110

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures

111

Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures

ECA Communication Fault

SA 239

SPN 520200

FMI 2, 9

Overview

The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA communicates with the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults or include other operation information.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.• The HCM CAN data link error is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the ECA looses communication on the CAN data link for 2 seconds.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- CAN data link from the ECA to the link

- ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 18 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded

by the HCM. Upon approaching idle the clutch will open and remain in this state.• If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318

112

Connector Views Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures

• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

27

28

2B

2A

HCM ECA

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34 ECA 8-Way Harness Connector

E

A B C D

H G F

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

113

Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 18 is active Go to Fault Code 19 procedure on page 115.

If Fault Code 18 is not active Test complete. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 18 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 18 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

114

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures

115

Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures

CAN ECA Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 520273

FMI 2, 9

Overview

Controller Area Network (CAN) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the CAN data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The HCM CAN Communication Link Fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive ECA data (like clutch position) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on CAN.

• FMI 2 is only active in PDM and is set when the HCM does not receive 3 consecutive messages from the ECA.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 9, 2- CAN data link

- ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 19 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Only” mode.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to

the last position commanded by the HCM.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

116

Connector Views Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

27

28

2B

2A

HCM ECA

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

ECA 8-Way Connector

E

A B C D

H G F

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

117

Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect ECA 8-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins A and B.

If resistance between pin A and B is between 50-70 ohms

Replace ECA. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V

118

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 19 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 19 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

119

Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures

J1939 ABS Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 563

FMI 2, 9, 14

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The HCM is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the ABS module.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The J1939 data link communication fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive ABS messages and there are no active J1939 faults. In PDM mode (FMI 2) this fault will be set if 3 consecutive messages (EBC1) are not received.

• FMI 14 is set when the HCM receives an active ABS signal (SPN563) out of range or the ABS “Fully Operational Signal” (SPN1243) is not present for 1 second.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- J1939 data link- ABS Module

• FMI 14- ABS module configured to communicate on J1708 or analog instead of J1939.

- ABS module reporting an active fault.

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 22 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• If the fault occurs while moving, the operation mode will go into “AutoShift Only” Mode.• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

120

Connector Views Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

ABS HCM

2 J1939 LowJ1939 Low

Front Harness View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

3 J1939 HighJ1939 High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

121

Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve the active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. What FMI’s are present? If code 22 FMI 9 is listed Concern is either:1. ABS Module2. J1939 data link from ABS module to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedures.

If code 22 FMI 14 is listed Concern is either:1. ABS Module is configured for J1708 instead of J1939 communication2. ABS module. Refer to OEM for repair procedure.

122

Connector Views Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures

123

Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures

J1939 HCM Message Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 525

MID 130

SID 231

FMI 9

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) communicates with the Hybrid Control Module over the J1939 data link during vehicle operation to exchange requested gear and current gear information.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• No J1939 data link fault currently active in the TECU.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the TECU fails to receive transmission data (like requested gear) for 2 seconds on greater from the HCM, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 9- J1939 data link

- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 24 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” and will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in current gear. When the vehicle comes to

a stop the clutch will open and remain in this position.• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp may display on the dash due to an active fault code 48.

124

Connector Views Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU HCM

2 2 J1939 LowJ1939 Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

3 J1939 High3J1939 High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

125

Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3.

If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms

Replace HCM. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V

126

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 24 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 24 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

127

Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures

Clutch Slip Fault

SA 239

SPN 522

FMI 10

Overview

The mechanical clutch assembly is controlled through the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) that is mounted on the clutch housing. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the ECA position and monitors several variables to determine if their is a slip concern in the clutch when it is in the closed position.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• There is no active fault code 18 or 19 present.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 10 is set when the gear position is not neutral, the clutch is in the engaged position and the difference between the transmission input shaft speed sensor and the engine speed is greater than 150 RPM for 1 second or longer.

Note: A “CA” will appear if the clutch is allowed to slip and create heat beyond the a set point. Do not use the throttle as a hill hold device as it will cause clutch damage and a “CA.”

Possible Causes

• FMI 10

- Clutch assembly

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 26 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

128

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Is fault code 64 also active Yes Go to procedure for fault code 64 on page 223.

No Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Is fault code 27 FMI 13 also active

Yes Go to procedure for fault code 27 FMI 13 on page 131.

No Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Start engine.

3. Drive the vehicle under load in highest gear possible. At a steady speed, quickly and fully press and hold the throttle.

If code 26 is active Replace Clutch. See CLMT-0365 for installation procedures. Go to STEP V

If code 26 is not active Test is complete. Go to STEP V

129

Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 26 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 26 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

130

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures

131

Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures

Clutch Disengagement Fault

SA 239

SPN 788

FMI 7, 14

Overview

The mechanical clutch assembly is controlled through the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) that is mounted on the clutch housing. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the ECA position and monitors several variables to determine if their is a slip concern in the clutch when it is in the closed position.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the set when engine torque is greater than 400 Nm, engine torque commanded is less than 0 for 0.3 seconds and the clutch position commanded is open for 1 second with the gear position confirmed in neutral. Or, if the clutch input speed is greater than 300 RPM, the clutch output speed is greater than 300 RPM, the clutch is commanded open for 1 second, and the selected gear is neutral with everything above being true for 10 seconds.

• FMI 14 is set when the HCM has commanded the ECA to disengage the clutch and the input shaft speed is greater than 315 RPM for more than 11 seconds with the transmission in neutral and the engine running.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Clutch Assembly- ECA

• FMI 14- Clutch Assembly

- Cross-shafts

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 27 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 7.• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 14.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• If this fault occurs while driving, the vehicle will operate and the transmission will shift to

neutral once the vehicle comes to a stop.

132

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. If fault code 64 is listed If fault code 27 FMI 7 or 14 are listed with an active fault code 64

Go to procedure for fault code 64 on page 223

If fault code 27 FMI 7 is listed with no active fault code 64

Go to STEP B

If fault code 27 FMI 14 is listed with no active fault code 64

Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Start engine.

3. Launch vehicle and drive until 6th gear is obtained. Then slow down to a stop.

4. Repeat the launch 5 times.

5. Is FMI 7 active If FMI 7 is active Replace the Clutch. See CLMT0365 for installation procedure. Go to STEP V

If FMI 7 is not active Test is complete. Go to STEP V

133

Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove Electric Clutch Actuator from transmission housing.

3. Attempt to rotate the cross-shaft and yoke assembly by hand.

If the cross-shaft assembly rotates by hand from the release bearing to the transmission case

Replace the Clutch. See CLMT0365 for installation procedure. Go to STEP V

If the cross-shaft assembly does not rotate by hand

Replace the cross-shaft, bushings, and grease. Repeat STEP C

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 27 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 27 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

134

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures

135

Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures

Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 43

MID 130

PID 43

FMI 2

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation. Ignition powers is fused and provided from the key switch. Application of this input initiates the power-up sequence.

Conditions to Run Fault

• Output Shaft Speed must be greater than 0 RPM.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses ignition power during operation for 2 seconds or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the “Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM)” See page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2- Ignition power supply to TECU

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 32 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red 'Service” lamp will display and an “F’ will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” Mode. • If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open

when the vehicle approaches an idle. The default start gear will be engaged and the clutch will close if the throttle is depressed.

• No lamps will be illuminated on the Push Button if the fault occurs prior to power-up or while in neutral.

• Only the current mode lamp will be illuminated if the fault occurs while driving.• The Push Button will start to tone when the vehicle approaches a stop and continue until

power is returned.

136

Connector Views Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

TECU

30

86

87 85

87

86

85

30

35 Ignition

Typical Relay Switch

Ignition Relay

Ground

Vehicle Ignition

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Front View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

137

Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest If code 32 is active after performing Electrical Pretest

Replace TECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If code 32 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear Codes. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 32 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 32 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

138

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures

139

Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures

Low Battery Voltage Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 168

MID 130

PID 168

FMI 4

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal “Hybrid Mode” operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 4 is set when the TECU battery voltage drops below 7 volts for more than 1 second.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 4 has several areas that may cause this fault.- Power Supply to TECU- Low batteries or bad main power connection- Charging system

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 33 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• TECU switches to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• No lamps are illuminated on the Push Button.• If this fault occurs prior to power-up, the vehicle will not crank.• If this fault occurs while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current gear and the clutch will

open when the vehicle comes to a stop.

140

Connector Views Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

TECU 24V Truck Battery

24V Plus38 TECU Power

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

36 TECU Ground

Front View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

Ground

141

Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 33 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace TECU (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V

If code 33 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear codes. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 33 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 33 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

142

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures

143

Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures

Weak Battery Voltage Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 168

MID 130

PID 168

FMI 14

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal “Hybrid Mode” operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. • The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 14 is set when the TECU battery voltage drops below 9 volts for 10 seconds.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 14 has several areas that may cause this fault.- Power supply to TECU- Low batteries or bad main power connection- Charging system

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 34 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• TECU switches to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• If this fault occurs while moving, it causes a 1-speed fallback. • If the vehicle is stopped, the starting gear and reverse can be engaged.

144

Connector Views Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

TECU 24V Truck Battery

24V Plus38 TECU Power

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

36 TECU Ground

Front View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

Ground

145

Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 34 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace TECU (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V

If code 34 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear codes. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 34 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 34 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

146

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures

147

Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Communication Link Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 639

MID 130

SID 231

FMI 2

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the engine Engine Control Module (ECM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU Battery Voltage Low fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses communication will all modules on the J1939 data link for 5 seconds or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2 - J1939 data link

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 35 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will change to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in current gear and the clutch will open

once vehicle speed approaches idle.

148

Connector Views Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Front Harness View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU

D

9 Pin DiagnosticConnector

3J1939 High TECU C

2J1939 Low TECU

J1939 High

J1939 Low

9 Pin Diagnostic Connector

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

149

Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Select the “Vehicle Components” screen and view the various modules that are reporting on the J1939 link

If TECU is not reporting on J1939, but the HCM is listed

Go to STEP B

If the HCM and TECU are not reporting on J1939

Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3.

5. Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms

Replace TECU. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V

150

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure resistance between the diagnostic connector 9-way pins Cand D.

If resistance between pin C and D is between 50-70 ohms

Go to STEP D

If resistance is 70 ohms or greater

One or more of the terminating resistors on the J1939 data link harness is missing or out of range, or there is an open in the link. Go to STEP V

If resistance is 50 ohms or less There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure the resistance between the following 9-way diagnostic connector pins:

• C to ground• D to ground

If resistance between pin C to ground and D to ground are both 10K ohms or greater

Attempt to communicate with another vehicle to ensure ServiceRanger is working. If ServiceRanger fails to communicate with another vehicle, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

151

Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 35 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 35 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

152

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures

153

Fault Code 36 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Engine Message Faults

SA 3

SPN 639

MID 130

SID 231

FMI 14

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the engine Engine Control Module (ECM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU Battery Voltage Low fault is not active.• The TECU J1939 data link fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 14 is set when the TECU fails to receive engine ECM data like engine torque for 5 seconds or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 14- J1939 data link

- ECM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 36 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If the fault occurs while moving, the TECU will go into “AutoShift Fallback” Mode.• Once the vehicle stops, start and reverse gears can be selected and the transmission will

operate in AutoSelect mode.• If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will crank.

154

Connector Views Fault Code 36 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 36 is active Concern is either:1. Engine ECM2. data link from Engine ECM to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedure.

If code 36 is inactive Test complete.

Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU Engine ECM

3J1939 High TECU

2J1939 Low TECU

(refer to OEM engine wiringdiagram for pin outs)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

155

Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures

Power Supply Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 610

MID 130

SID 251

FMI 5

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal “Hybrid Mode” operation. The TECU main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the TECU 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU will only run this test if the electric shifter is being cycled from “N” to gear.

Note: Changing the start gear from “N” will allow this test to run.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 5 is set when the TECU power supply resistance is measured before and during an electric shifter test and the results show a measurement of 0.4 ohms or greater.

Possible Causes

• FMI 5- Power supply to TECU- Low batteries or bad main power connection- Broken or corroded battery interconnect straps may also be the cause of high

resistance readings

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 37 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

156

Connector Views Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Front View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

TECU 24V Battery

Negative (-)

38 TECU Power Positive (+)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

36 TECU Ground

4-Pin Diagnostics Port

4-way

B - Service Bat. + C - Service Bat. - A - Service Ignition +

B A

D C

4-Pin Diagnostic Port (Located at the left rear

corner of the transmission.)

Warning! - Do Not Load Test at Diagnostic Port

157

Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 37 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If code 37 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest

Clear codes. Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Locate diagnostic port on transmission harness

2. Key on.

3. Measure voltage between pins C and the battery negative post

If voltage between pin C and battery negative post is 0.7 volts or less

Go to STEP C

If voltage is outside of range Repair battery ground supply to transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Locate diagnostic port on Transmission Harness.

2. Key on.

3. Measure voltage between pins B and pin C.

If voltage between pins B and C is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage

Go to STEP D

If voltage is outside of range Repair battery power supply to Transmission ECU. Fuse may be blown. Repeat test.

158

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between pin A and pin C.

If voltage between pins A and C is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage

Go to STEP E

If voltage is outside of range Repair Ignition power supply to ECU. Fuse may be blown. Repeat test.

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the Vehicle Harness 38-way.

4. Inspect main power 38-way connector terminals pin 36 and 38, in-line fuse holder, and power supply connections for integrity and corrosion.

If no problem found Go to STEP V

If problem is found Repair power/ground path for the main power supply. Go to STEP V

159

Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 37 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 37 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

160

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures

161

Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures

Battery Fan Relay Fault

SA 239

SPN 520243

FMI 3, 4, 5, 14

Overview

The Battery Fan Relay is a normally open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Battery Fan located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC), which provides the cooling for the high-voltage batteries.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay.

• FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay. • FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay. • FMI 14 is set when the following conditions are true for 10 minutes; the high-voltage battery

temperature is greater than 55°C, the difference between the minimum and maximum battery temperatures is less than 1°C, and there are no battery temperature faults from the Battery Control Module.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3, 4, 5- Vehicle harness from HCM to Battery Fan Relay- Battery Fan Relay- HCM

• FMI 14- Battery Fan Relay- Battery Fan- Plugged Air Filter

- Battery Fan Relay main power supply

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 38 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

162

Connector Views Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

26 86

87

85

30

Battery Fan

Typical Relay Switch

Battery Fan Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

4 Battery Fan Return

PEC

12

Ground 14

Battery Fan Supply

Cooling Fan Plus

Cooling Fan Minus

Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Harness Connector View (PEC 19 - Way)

8 9

1

2

3 4 5

6

7 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

17

18

19

163

Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

3. Change battery fan relay with another relay to see if fault returns

If fault does not return with new relay

Replace the battery fan relay. Go to STEP V

If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. What FMIs were listed in Step A?

Note: The Battery Fan Relay must be wired according to Eaton® requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic.

If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP C

If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP D

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E

If FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP F

WARNING

164

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable

3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector

4. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and 4.

If the resistance between pins 26 and 4 is 40-120 ohms

Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If the resistance is outside the range

Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and ground at key on

If voltage between pin 26 and ground is 0 volts

Replace the HCM (only is fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If voltage between pin 26 and ground is 24 volts

Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and ground

If resistance between pin 26 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

165

Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove and inspect the Air filter on the PEC inlet and the exhaust screen on the PEC outlet.

If the air filter and screen are clean and free from debris

Go to STEP G

If the air filter is dirty or the exhaust screen is plugged

Replace the Air Filter and clean the Exhaust Screen. Go to STEP V

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab.

3. Key on.

4. Go to Product Tests and select Battery Fan Relay.

If airflow can be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust

If Fault Code is Active contact Eaton® at 1-800-826-4357.

If airflow can not be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust

Go to STEP H

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Disconnect the 19-way connector at the PEC.

3. Measure voltage at the 19-way connector from pin 12 to pin 14.

If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Replace the PEC Fan. Go to STEP V

If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is outside of range

Repair wiring or relay problem. Refer to OEM.

166

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 38 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 38 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

167

Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures

Heat Exchanger Relay Fault

SA 239

SPN 520247

FMI 3, 4, 5

Overview

The Heat Exchanger Fan Relay is normally an open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Heat Exchanger Fan located on the hybrid liquid cooling system radiator. The fan is used to provide additional airflow in certain situations like slow driving or ePTO operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay.

• FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay.

• FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3,4,5- Vehicle harness from HCM to Heat Exchanger Relay - Heat Exchanger Relay- HCM

- Heat Exchanger Relay Fuse

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 39 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

168

Connector Views Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

35 86

87

85

30

Heat Exchange Fan HSD

Typical Relay Switch

Heat Exchanger Fan Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

37 Heat Exchange Fan LSD

Heat Exchanger Fan

A

Ground B

HEF Supply

HEF Plus

HEF Minus

Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

HEF Plus

Fuse

169

Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Change heat exchanger fan relay with another relay and see if the fault returns

If fault does not return with new relay

Replace the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay. Go to STEP V

If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

3. Select “Configurations” menu and pick the Hybrid Control Module option.

4. Is there an option for Heat Exchanger Fan

The Heat Exchanger Fan option is shown and the vehicle has the Hybrid cooling system heat exchanger fan installed

Go to STEP C

The Heat Exchanger Fan option is shown and the vehicle does not have the Hybrid cooling system heat exchanger fan installed

Write down the model number on the transmission tag and contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

170

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. What FMIs were listed from Step A?

Note: The heat exchanger fan relay must be wired according to Eaton requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently consult OEM for correct wiring schematic.

If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP D

If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP E

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP F

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable

3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and 37

If resistance between pins 35 and 37 is 40 - 120 ohms

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit or blown fuse. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure the voltage between HCM system harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground

If voltage between pin 35 and ground is 0 volts

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If voltage between pin 35 and ground is 24 volts

Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V

171

Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable

3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground

If resistance between pins 35 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 39 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 39 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

172

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures

173

Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

Cooling Pump Relay Fault

SA 239

SPN 520248

FMI 3, 4, 5, 14

Overview

The Cooling Pump Relay is normally an open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Cooling Pump that circulates the coolant on the hybrid liquid system.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay.

• FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay.

• FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay.• FMI 14 is set when the following occur for 10 minutes or longer; the Inverter temperature is

greater than 50°C, the difference between the maximum battery temperature and the Inverter temperature is greater than 20°C, and there are no battery temperature or motor temperature faults.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3,4,5- Vehicle harness from HCM to Cooling Pump Relay - Cooling Pump Relay- HCM

• FMI 14- Cooling Pump Relay- Cooling Pump- Cooling Pump Relay main power supply

- Low Coolant, Low Coolant Flow, Plugged Radiator, Fan Operation

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

174

Connector Views Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

32 86

87

85

30

Coolant Pump

Typical Relay Switch

Coolant Pump Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

4 Coolant Pump Return

Coolant Pump

A

Ground B

Coolant Pump Supply

Coolant Pump Plus

Coolant Pump Minus

Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

175

Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

3. Change cooling pump relay with another relay and see if fault returns

If fault does not return with new relay

Replace the cooling pump relay. Go to STEP V

If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. What FMI’s were listed from Step A?

Note: The Cooling Pump Relay must be wired according to Eaton® requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic.

If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP C

If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP D

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E

If FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP F

WARNING

176

Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4

If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms

Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between HCM system harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground at key on

If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 0 volts

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts

Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the HCM system harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the HCM system harness 38-way connector pins 32 and ground

If resistance between pin 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

177

Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Note the level of the coolant in the Hybrid Liquid Cooling System.

If the coolant is within the recommended limits.

Go to STEP G

If the coolant is below the recommended limits.

Refer to OEM for coolant type and fill procedure. Go to STEP V

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab.

3. Key on.

4. Go to “Product Tests” and select Coolant Pump Relay.

5. Listen for the Coolant Pump to turn on and watch for coolant flow in the reservoir.

If the coolant pump runs and coolant is moving through the reservoir.

If Fault Code is Active contact Eaton® at 1-800-826-4357.

If the coolant pump does not run Go to STEP H

If the coolant pump does run and coolant does not flow

Check for kinks or sharp bends in the coolant lines. If okay contact OEM for concerns with coolant pump.

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Disconnect the 2-way connector at the Coolant Pump.

3. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B.

If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage.

Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump problem.

If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range.

Repair wiring or relay problem. Refer to OEM.

178

Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 40 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 40 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

179

Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Transmission Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 523

FMI 2, 9

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The J1939 data link communication fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive TECU data (like current gear) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- J1939 data link

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 48 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The red “Service” lamp may display and a “F” may flash in the gear display due to an active

fault code 24.• The operation mode is changed to “AutoShift Only” mode.• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will shift, however, when the vehicle comes to a stop

the clutch will open and remain in the open position.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

180

Connector Views Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU HCM

2 2 J1939 LowJ1939 Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

3 J1939 High3J1939 High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

181

Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3.

If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50 to 70 ohms.

Replace TECU. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance is outside of range. Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 48 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 48 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

182

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures

183

Fault Code 49 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Engine Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 190

FMI 2, 9

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Engine Control Module (ECM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The J1939 data link communication fault is not active

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive Engine ECM data (like engine torque) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 9- J1939 data link from Engine ECM

- ECM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 49 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Only” mode.• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

184

Connector Views Fault Code 49 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 49 is active Concern is either:1. Engine ECM2. Data link from Engine ECM to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedure.

If code 49 is inactive Test complete.

ECM HCM

2 J1939 LowJ1939 Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

3 J1939 HighJ1939 High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

185

Fault Code 50 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Body Controller Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 701

FMI 2, 9

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Body Controller.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The J1939 data link communication fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the HCM is in PDM mode and fails to receive messages from the body controller for 1 second.

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive messages from the body controller for seconds.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- J1939 data link

- Body Controller

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 50 is set the following conditions will occur:

• No hybrid lamps are lit when this code is active.• Fault is stored in HCM memory• HCM disables ePTO operation, since parameters like hydraulic demand are unavailable

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

186

Connector Views Fault Code 50 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If code 50 is active Concern is either:

a. Body Controller

b. Data link from Body Controller to J1939 data link backbone.

Refer to OEM for repair procedure.

If code 50 is inactive Test complete.

Body Controller HCM

2 J1939 LowJ1939 Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

3 J1939 HighJ1939 High

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

187

Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures

Rail Position Sensor Fault

SA 3

SPN 60

MID 130

PID 60

FMI 2, 3, 4, 10

Overview

The Rail Position Sensor is a Hall Effect position sensor that provides feedback on the position of the shift finger. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) delivers a constant 5 volt reference to one terminal of the Rail Position Sensor. The signal output from sensor provides a regulated voltage signal from 0.5 volts to 4.5 volts. The last terminal provides a ground for the Rail Position Sensor to the TECU.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• FMI’s 3 and 4 will not be set if the TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is active.• FMI 2 will not set if FMI 3,4 is active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor voltage is above 4.5 volts or below 0.5 volts for 1 second of longer.

• FMI 3 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% above the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer.

• FMI 4 set when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% below the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer.

• FMI 10 (refer to troubleshooting guide TRTS0930)

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 10- Transmission Harness- Rail Position Sensor- TECU

• FMI’s 3, 4

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 51 is set the following conditions will occur:

188

Connector Views Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch

will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. • The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” Mode.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

B

A

C

Rail Position Sensor Pins

TECU

20

18

19

Rail Position Sensor

Hall EffectB C

A

C

A

B

Rail Position Plus

Rail Position Signal

Rail Position Minus

E: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locat

189

Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. What FMI’s are present If FMI 3 or 4 is listed Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If FMI 2, 10 is listed Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins:

• 18 to 19

• 18 to 20

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If pin 18 and 19 resistance is 100 to 200 ohms and if pin 18 and 20 resistance is 5K to 7K ohms

Go to STEP C

If any of the above conditions are not met

Go to STEP D

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 18 to ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater

Replace TECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms

Go to STEP D

190

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect Transmission Harness from Rail Select Sensor.

2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Sensor pins:

• A to C

• A to B

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If pin A and C resistance is 5K to 7K and if pin A and B resistance is 100 to 200 ohms

Replace the transmission harness. Go to STEP V

If any to the above conditions are not met

Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 51 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 51 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

191

Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures

Gear Position Sensor Fault

SA 3

SPN 59

MID 130

PID 59

FMI 2, 3, 4

Overview

The Rail Position Sensor is a Hall Effect position sensor that provides feedback on the position of the shift finger. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) delivers a constant 5 volt reference to one terminal of the Rail Position Sensor. The signal output from sensor provides a regulated voltage signal from 0.5 volts to 4.5 volts. The last terminal provides a ground for the Rail Position Sensor to the TECU.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• FMI 3, 4 will not be set if the TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is active.• FMI 2 will not set if FMI 3, 4 is active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor voltage is above 4.5 volts or below 0.5 volts for 1 second of longer.

• FMI 3 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% above the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer.

• FMI 4 set when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% below the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2- Transmission Harness- Rail Position Sensor- TECU

• FMI 3,4

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 51 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.

192

Gear Position Sensor Fault Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch

will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. • The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback Mode.”

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

193

Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. What FMIs are present. If FMI 3 or 4 is listed. Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If FMI 2 is listed. Go to STEP B

Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

B

A

C

Gear Position Sensor Pins

TECU

12

10

11

Rail Position Sensor

Hall EffectB C

A

C

A

B

Gear Position Plus

Gear Position Signal

Gear Position Minus

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

194

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins:

• 18 and 19• 18 and 20

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If pin 18 and 19 resistance is 100 to 200 ohms and if pin 18 and 20 resistance is 5K to 7K ohms.

Go to STEP C

If any of the above conditions are not met.

Go to STEP D

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 18 to ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater.

Replace TECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms.

Go to STEP D

195

Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect Transmission Harness from Rail Select Sensor.

2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Sensor pins:

• A and C• A and B

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used.

If pin A and C resistance is 5K to 7K and if pin A and B resistance is 100 to 200 ohms.

Replace the transmission harness. Go to STEP V

If any to the above conditions are not met.

Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 52 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 52 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

196

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures

197

Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures

Input Shaft Speed Sensor Fault

SA 3

SPN 161

MID 130

PID 161

FMI 2, 3, 4, 5, 10

Overview

The Input Shaft Speed Sensor is located on the 6-bolt PTO cover, which is standard on the right side of the transmission. The sensor is a magnetic pickup that produces an AC voltage as the countershaft gear teeth moves past the end of the sensor. At idle the speed sensor output is low and increases as the speed of the countershaft increases.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

• FMI 10 requires the transmission to be in neutral and the vehicle speed must be within range.• FMI 2 will not set if there is already an active FMI 5 for the Input or Output Shaft Speed

Sensors.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the TECU input shaft speed is compared to the output shaft speed and it produces an inconsistent reading for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 3 and 4 are set when the TECU detects a short to ground, short to battery, and the input shaft speed is 0 for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 5 is set when the TECU detects an open circuit and the Input Shaft Speed Sensor is 0 for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 10 is set when the TECU detects a 200 RPM or greater speed difference between the input shaft speed and the raw input shaft speed for 10 ms or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25

Possible Causes

• FMI 2,10- Input Shaft Speed Sensor- TECU- Transmission Harness- Damaged Transmission Gearing- Contamination on the input shaft speed sensor

• FMI 3, 4, 5- Input Shaft Speed Sensor- TECU

198

Connector Views Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures

- Transmission Harness

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 56 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” Mode. • If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch

will open when the vehicle comes to a stop.• If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will crank but the transmission will not engage a

gear.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector ViewsHarness Front View

(TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU Input ShaftSpeed Sensor

7

8 B

A

A B

Input Shaft Speed Sensor (Connect View)

Input Shaft Speed Sensor High

Input Shaft SpeedSensor Low

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

199

Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Disconnect negative battery cable.

4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

5. Measure the resistance between the transmission harness 38-way connector pins 7 and 8 and pin 7 and ground.

If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms and pin 7 to ground is 10K ohms or greater

Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of the range

Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure the voltage from between the transmission harness 38-way connector pin 7 and ground

If voltage is 0 volts Go to STEP C

If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Inspect Input Shaft Speed Sensor for contamination or damage.

If no problem found Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If problem if found or you were sent here from Step D or E

Replace Input Shaft Speed Sensor and inspect the countershaft gear for damage. Go to STEP V

200

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the Transmission Harness from Input Shaft Speed Sensor.

2. Measure resistance between Input Shaft Speed Sensor pins A and B.

If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms Go to STEP E

If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between Input Shaft Speed Sensor pin A and ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms

Go to STEP C

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Verify proper installation of speed sensor.

4. Key on.

5. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

7. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 56 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 56 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

201

Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures

Output Shaft Speed Sensor Fault

SA 3

SPN 191

MID 130

PID 191

FMI 2, 3, 4, 5

Overview

The Output Shaft Speed Sensor is located on the rear bearing cover at the 12 o’clock position. The sensor is a magnetic pickup that produces an AC voltage as the tone wheel teeth moves past the end of the sensor. At idle the speed sensor output is low and it increases as the speed of the output shaft increases.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

• FMI 2 will not set if there is already an active FMI 5 for the Input or Output Shaft Speed Sensors.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the TECU output shaft speed is compared to the input shaft speed and it produces an inconsistent reading for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 3,4 are set when the TECU detects a short to ground, short to battery, or the output shaft speed is 0 for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 5 is set when the TECU detects an open and the Output Shaft Speed Sensor is 0 for 1 second or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2- Output Shaft Speed Sensor- TECU- Transmission Harness- Damaged Transmission Gearing- Contamination on the output shaft speed sensor

• FMI 3, 4, 5- Output Shaft Speed Sensor- TECU

- Transmission Harness

202

Connector Views Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 58 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch

will open when the vehicle comes to a stop.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU Output ShaftSpeed Sensor

23

24 B

A

A B

Output Shaft Speed Sensor (Connect View)

Output Shaft Speed Sensor High

Output Shaft SpeedSensor Low

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

203

Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Disconnect negative battery cable.

4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector.

5. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 23 and 24 and 23 and ground.

If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms and pin 23 to ground is 10K ohms or greater

Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of the range

Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 23 and ground

If voltage is 0 volts Go to STEP C

If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Inspect Output Shaft Speed Sensor for contamination or damage.

If no problem found

If problem is found or you were sent here from Step D or E

Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

Replace OUtput Shaft Speed Sensor and inspect the tone wheel for damage, looseness or corrosion. Go to STEP V

204

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the Transmission Harness from the Output Shaft Speed Sensor.

2. Measure resistance between Output Shaft Speed Sensor pins A and B.

If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms Go to STEP E

If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between Output Shaft Speed Sensor pin A and ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms

Go to STEP C

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Verify proper installation of speed sensor.

4. Key on.

5. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

7. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 58 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 58 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

205

Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures

J1939 Communication Link Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 639

FMI 2, 9

Overview

J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit or receive operation information from other modules on the network like the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) or Engine Control Module (ECM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set in PDM mode and the HCM loses communication with other modules on the J1938 data link for 3 consecutive messages.

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM looses communication with all modules on the J1939 data link for 30 consecutive messages or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- J1939 data link

- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 59 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” and red “Stop Hybrid” lamps will not display, since the lamps are driven over the J1939 data link.

• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Only” mode.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will shift, however, when the vehicle comes to a stop

the clutch will open and remain open.• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled; however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• You may see a red “Service” lamp, and a “F” will flash in the gear display due to the active fault

code 24,35, or 36.

206

Connector Views Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

D

Front Harness View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

9 Pin DiagnosticConnector

3J1939 High C

2J1939 Low

J1939 High

J1939 Low

9 Pin Diagnostic Connector

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

207

Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Select the “Vehicle Components” screen and view the various modules that are reporting on the J1939 link

If the HCM is not reporting on J1939 but the TECU is listed

Go to STEP B

If the HCM and TECU are not reporting on J1939

Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3.

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms

Replace HCM. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V

208

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure the resistance between pins C and D on the 9-way diagnostic connector

If resistance between pin C and D is 50-70 ohms

Go to STEP D

If resistance is 70 ohms or greater

One or more of the terminating resistors on the J1939 data link harness is missing, out of range, or there is an open in the link. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V

If resistance is 50 ohms or less There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Measure resistance between pins C and ground on the 9-way diagnostic connector

If resistance between pin C and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Attempt to communicate with another vehicle and ensure ServiceRanger is working. If ServiceRanger fails to communicate with another vehicle, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

209

Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 59 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 59 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

210

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures

211

Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures

CAN Communication Link Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 625

FMI 2, 9

Overview

The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link that connects the HCM to the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), Battery Control Module and Inverter. The link contains one 120 ohm resistor at each end. The link is used to transmit information specific to clutch position or power electronics operations.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM loses communication with all modules on the CAN data link for 30 consecutive messages or greater.

• FMI 2 is set in PDM mode when the HCM loses communication on the Hybrid CAN for 3 consecutive messages.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9 - CAN data link

- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 60 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Only” mode.• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank.• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regeneration are disabled, however, the high-voltage

relays will remain powered.• If the fault sets while driving the clutch will either close or open and remain in this position

permanently.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

212

Connector Views Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM H

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

9 Pin DiagnosticConnector28CAN High

J

27CAN Low

CAN Low

CAN High

9 Pin Diagnostic Connector

(Terminating Resistor in HCM)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

213

Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Measure the resistance between one of the following:

• Diagnostic the 9-pin connector pins H and J.

• Pins A and B on the 3-way connector.

• Pins 1 and 2 on the 2-way connector.

If resistance between pin H and J, A and B, or 1 and 2 is between 50 to 70 ohms

Go to STEP B

Note: The 3-way and 2-way data link connectors are located next to the 9-pin diagnostic connector

If resistance is more than 70 ohms

One or more of the terminating resistors on the CAN data link harness is either missing or out of range, or there is an open in the link. Repair OEM CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale).

If resistance is less than 50 ohms There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 27 and 28.

If resistance between pin 27 and 28 is between 110-130 ohms

Replace HCM. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale)

If resistance is outside of range Repair the CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V

214

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 60 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 60 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

215

Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures

Rail Select Motor Fault

SA 3

SPN 772

MID 130

SID 39

FMI 5, 6

Overview

The Electric Shifter contains two electric motors called the Rail and Gear motors. These motors move a shift finger between the various rails which engage the shift rails. Power is supplied from the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active• The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active• The Electric Shifter is not energized and the shift finger is not moving

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 5 and 6 are set when the TECU detects 5 continuous open or short conditions on the Electric Shifter while the motor drive circuit is idle in a 500 ms interval.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 5, 6 - Electric Shifter- TECU

- Transmission Harness

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 61 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red 'Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” mode. • If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch

will open when the vehicle comes to a stop.

216

Connector Views Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU

35

37

Rail Select Motor

Rail Motor Minus

Rail Motor Plus

Harness Front View(Rail Select Motor)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

B A

217

Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key Off.

3. Disconnect negative battery cable.

4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector from the Transmission ECU.

5. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and 37

If resistance is 0.3 to 150 ohms Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms

Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect 2-way Rail Select motor connector from the Transmission Harness.

2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Motor harness 2-way connector pins A and B and A to ground.

If resistance between A & B is 0.3 to 150 ohms and pin A to ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

218

Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 61 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 61 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

219

Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures

Gear Select Motor Fault

SA 3

SPN 773

MID 130

SID 40

FMI 5, 6

Overview

The Electric Shifter contains two electric motors called the Rail and Gear motors. These motors move a shift finger between the various rails which engage the shift rails. Power is supplied from the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active• The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active• The Electric Shifter is not energized and the shift finger is not moving

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 5 and 6 are set when the TECU detects 5 continuous open or short conditions on the Electric Shifter while the motor drive circuit is idle in a 500ms interval.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 5, 6 - Electric Shifter- TECU

- Transmission Harness

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 63 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Service” lamp will display and an “F” will flash in the gear display.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• The operation mode will be changed to “AutoShift Fallback” mode. • If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear position and

the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop.

220

Connector Views Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

TECU

36

38

Gear Select Motor

Gear Motor Minus

Gear Motor Plus

Harness Front View(Gear Select Motor)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

B A

221

Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key Off.

3. Disconnect negative battery cable.

4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector from the Transmission ECU.

If resistance is 0.3 to 150 ohms Go to STEP B

If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 36 and ground.

If resistance is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is less than 10K ohms

Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect 2-way Gear Select Motor connector from the Transmission Harness.

2. Measure resistance between Gear Select Motor harness 2-way connector pins A and B and A to ground.

If resistance between A and B is 0.3 to 150 ohms and pin A to ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

222

Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 63 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 63 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

223

Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures

ECA Fault

SA 239

SPN 788, 520198, 520199, 524035

FMI 0, 12, 13, 21 - 28

Overview

The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery and an 8-way connector that is connected to inputs like the HCM and the Engine Speed Sensor. The ECA communicates with the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults, or include other operation information.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.• The ECA Battery Voltage is greater than 7.8 when ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 12 is set for various internal ECA failures.• FMI 22-28 can be set for excessive motor current or incorrect shaft position.• FMI 0 is set when the ECA inverter temperature exceeds 130°C.• FMI 13 is set when the ECA can not find the clutch release bearing touch point after three

attempts.

Possible Causes

• FMI 12- ECA

• FMI 21-28- Excessive debris buildup on/around the ECA.- Binding cross-shafts.

• FMI 0- MIssing exhaust shield or exhaust to close to ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 64 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 12, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, or 28.• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 0, 13, or 25.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to

the last position commanded by the HCM.• If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank.

224

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• Service Ranger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. What FMI’s are present If FMI 0is listed Check for damaged or missing exhaust shielding by the ECA. Replace or reroute exhaust to reduce internal ECA temperatures. Go to STEP V

If FMI 12 is listed Replace the ECA. Go to STEP V

If FMI 21-28 are listed Go to STEP B

225

Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 24 volt battery cables

2. Remove the ECA from the clutch housing.

3. Check the ECA and clutch housing for debris build-up

4. Rotate the clutch release shaft by hand to check for binding

If no excessive debris is found and clutch release shaft rotates without binding.

Replace ECA. Go to STEP V

If excessive debris is found around ECA or inside the clutch housing or the clutch release shaft binds when rotated by hand.

Remove debris build up around ECA area. Replace / repair clutch release shaft and upper bushing as needed for proper shaft rotation. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 64 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 64 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

226

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures

227

Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures

ECA Speed Sensor Fault

SA 239

SPN 520203

FMI 2, 5

Overview

The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery and an 8-way connector that is connected to inputs like the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and the Engine Speed Sensor. The ECA communicates with the HCM over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults, or include other operation information.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.• Fault Code 18 or 87 are active

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is set when the HCM detects engine speed at idle, but does not detect ECA engine speed.

• FMI 5 is set when the ECA detects an open on the ECA speed sensor signal circuit at key on.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 5- ECA Speed Sensor- ECA Speed Sensor harness

- ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 65 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter

228

ECA Speed Sensor Fault Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures

• ServiceRanger

229

Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. What FMIs are listed? If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP B

If FMI 2 is listed Go to STEP C

ECA

2G

2F

Speed Sensor

Eng Speed Sensor (-)

Eng Speed Sensor (+)

BA

ABC

ECA 8-Way Connector

E

A B C D

H G F

ECA 3-Way Connector

A B

ECA Speed Sensor (Connect View)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

230

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Check resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and G

If resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and G is 140 - 180 ohms

Go to STEP C

If resistance is out of range Repair the open in the sensor or the harness from the ECA to the sensor. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Check resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and ground

If resistance is 10K or greater Go to STEP D

If resistance is out of range Repair the short to ground in the sensor or the harness from the ECA to the sensor. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage from the ECA 8-way connector pin G and ground

If voltage is 0 volts at key on and FMI 5 is active

Replace the ECA (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V

If voltage is 0 volts at key on and FMI 2 is active

Go to STEP E

If voltage is greater than 0 volts at key on

Repair the short to power on the ECA speed sensor harness. Go to STEP V

231

Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove the ECA speed sensor and examine the sensor end for signs of damage or debris buildup

If the sensor shows no cracks or signs of metallic debris buildup on the end

Go to STEP F

If the sensor is damaged or has debris buildup

Replace or clean the ECA sensor. Go to STEP V

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Inspect the engine flywheel to ensure there are no missing or damaged teeth

If flywheel teeth are all intact and in good condition

Reinstall flywheel sensor until it touches the flywheel then rotate counterclockwise 1/2 to 1 full turn. Tighten jam nut and drive vehicle. If fault returns replace the sensor. Go to STEP V

If flywheel teeth are damaged or missing

Concern is with the flywheel. Contact your OEM for repair procedures.

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 65 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 65 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

232

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures

233

Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures

ECA Battery Voltage Fault

SA 239

SPN 520271

FMI 3, 4, 14

Overview

The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery positive and negative terminals.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the ECA battery voltage is above 17 volts for 10 ms or greater.• FMI 4 is set when the ECA battery voltage is below 8.5 volts for 10 ms or greater.• FMI 14 is set when the ECA battery voltage is below 8.5 volts for 10 ms or greater, but the

HCM reports the battery voltage is within range.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3- Charging system- ECA

• FMI 4- ECA power supply harness, connections, and fuse holder- Low batteries or bad main power connection- Charging system- ECA

• FMI 14

- ECA power supply harness, connections, and fuse holder

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 66 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to

the last position commanded by the HCM, then the ECA holding device will engage• If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank

234

Connector Views Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

ECA

1C

Battery

1B

Plus

(+

)

Ground ECA Ground

ECA Power

ABC

ECA 3-Way Connector

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

235

Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If FMI 3 or 4 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace the ECA. Go to STEP V

If FMI 14 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest

Replace the ECA power harness. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 66 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 66 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

236

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures

237

Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures

ECA Ignition Voltage Fault

SA 239

SPN 520274

FMI 3, 4, 5

Overview

The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a 8-way connector that supplies ignition power to the ECA from the Hybrid Control Module (HCM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is shorted to the 24-volt system which is detected through the HCM prior to powering the ignition supply for the ECA.

• FMI 4 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is shorted to ground during key on operation which is detected by the HCM.

• FMI 5 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is open circuit after the key is on.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3, 4, 5- ECA ignition supply harness from HCM - HCM

- ECA

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 67 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to

the last position commanded by the HCM, then the ECA holding device will engage• If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

238

Connector Views Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

ECA

ECA Ignition (System) 13 2H

1C

Battery

1A

1B

Plus

(+

)

Ground

ECA Ignition

ECA Ground

ECA Power

ECA 8-Way Connector

E

A B C D

H G F

Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

239

Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. What FMI’s are present If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP B

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP C

If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP E

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the ECA 8-way connector.

3. Measure voltage on the ECA 8-way connector from pin H to ground.

If voltage is less than 0 volts Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the ECA 8-way connector.

3. Key on.

4. Measure voltage from the ECA 8-way connector from pin H to ground.

If voltage from H to ground is 23-25 volts

Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If voltage is outside of range Go to STEP D

240

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the HCM 38-way System Harness connector.

3. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pin 13 and ground

If resistance from pin 13 to ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the OEM harness from the ECA to the HCM. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the HCM 38-way System Harness connector.

3. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector and the ECA 8-way connector on the following pins:

• HVM pin 13 to ECA pin H

If the resistance between pins 13 and H is 0-0.3 ohms

Replace the ECA (only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the open in the harness between the ECA and HCM. Go to STEP V

241

Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 67 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 67 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

242

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures

243

Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures

Grade Sensor Fault

SA 239

SPN 520321

FMI 12, 13, 14

Overview

The grade sensor, an internal component of the HCM, calculates needed vehicle grade position for Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature to function properly. HSA will momentarily hold the service brakes at launch to allow single foot pedal operation without vehicle roll-back on grades.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 12 is set when the grade sensor is not active or present and Hill Start Assist is enabled in the HCM configuration.

• FMI 13 is set when Hill Start Assist is enabled in the HCM configuration but the grade sensor has not been calibrated.

• FMI 14 is set when the HCM is equipped with a grade sensor, HSA is enabled and the signal from the sensor is out of range.

Possible Causes

• FMI 12- Incorrect HCM configuration- HCM

• FMI 13- Grade sensor calibration- Incorrect HCM configuration

• FMI 14- HCM- Incorrect HCM mounting to transmission

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 68 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display only if the vehicle is moving.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

244

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• ServiceRanger

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If FMI 12 is active Go to STEP B

If FMI 13 is active Go to STEP C

If FMI 14 is active Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Using ServiceRanger view the Hybrid HCM configuration

HSA configuration is set at “HSA Enabled” and Hill Start Assist feature is not needed

Select “No HSA” from the drop down box on the right side of the screen, then save this configuration change by selecting download. Go to STEP V

HSA configuration is set at “HSA Enabled” and Hill Start Assist feature is needed

The HCM must be changed to hardware version 3.7 or higher containing an internal grade sensor. Contact Eaton for correct HCM part number information.

245

Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Using ServiceRanger calibrate the grade sensor by selecting the Advanced Product functions from the main menu

3. Select Hybrid Control Module from the upper left menu

4. Select Grade Sensor Calibration and follow the on screen instructions

If FMI 13 is not active after calibrating

Calibration complete. Go to STEP V

If FMI 13 is active after calibrating Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Ensure the HCM is properly mounted to the transmission

If HCM is not properly mounted or cap screws are loose

Tighten HCM mounting cap screws. Go to STEP V

If HCM is properly mounted to the transmission

Replace HCM. Go to STEP V

246

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 8 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 8 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

247

Fault Code 70 Isolation Procedures

Engine Failed to Respond Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 188, 518, 539, 544

FMI 0, 1, 2, 7

Overview

The HCM communicates with the Engine ECM over the J1939 data link during normal operation to control the engine torque and speed for transmission shifting.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• J1939 Communication Link Fault (HCM) not active.• J1939 Engine Message Fault (HCM) not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the HCM commanded engine torque is less than 80% Max Engine Torque, HCM commanded engine torque is greater than 100 ft. lbs., and the difference between commanded engine torque and engine torque feedback is greater than 80 lb-ft for more than 1 second. Or, if the engine speed or torque maps are received with an error.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Engine- Fuel System- Exhaust Back Pressure- Turbo charger- Air Intake/Filter Restriction- Un-reported engine loads

- Incorrect engine configuration settings for transmission assembly

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 70 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• If the fault is set while driving, the vehicle may experience shifting concerns.

Conditions to Clear Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

248

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 70 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Retrieve codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If code 70 is active Contact the OEM because the engine is failing to respond to the HCM’s command during a shift or the maps were received in error.

If code 70 is not active Test complete.

249

Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures

Failed to Disengage a Gear

SA 3

SPN 520275

MID 130

SID 60

FMI 7

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active.• TECU J1939 Communication Link Fault is not active.• J1939 engine torque is zero ± 5% and J1939 engine speed is within 50 RPM of synchronous.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails three consecutive attempts to disengage a gear.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Dragging Clutch- ECA- Shift Bar Housing- Electric Shifter- Gear Select Sensor- Yoke, Sliding Clutch, Mainshaft- TECU

- Torque locked in gear

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 71 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current gear and the clutch will open

when the vehicle comes to a stop.

250

Failed to Disengage a Gear Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position.

251

Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Depress “N” on the Push Button Shift Control.

4. Observe Gear Display. If Gear Display shows: “N” Go to STEP V

If Gear Display shows: “71” Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform the Electrical Pretest.

If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP C

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Repeat STEP A

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing to see what gear position is currently engaged.

3. Attempt to move the engaged rail back to neutral

If rails move from the engaged position to neutral

Go to STEP D

If rails do not move from the engaged position

Attempt to take the torque off the driveline. If concern is still present, inspect the main case for a damaged mainshaft, sliding clutch, or fork. Go to STEP V.

252

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Inspect the following:

• Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely

• Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup

• Two gears positions can not be engaged at the same time

If no problem found Replace the electric shifter. Go to STEP V

If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 72 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 72 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

253

Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures

Failed to Select Rail Fault

SA 3

SPN 520277

MID 130

SID 59

FMI 7

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active.• This fault may occur at power-up after 15 seconds.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails five consecutive attempts to engage a particular rail position.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Shift Bar Housing- Electric Shifter- Rail Select Sensor

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 72 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to select the proper rail position.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

254

Failed to Select Rail Fault Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position.

255

Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Place Shift Device in Neutral.

4. Depress Service Brake.

5. Observe gear display. If you have an active code 72 Go to STEP B

If Gear Display shows solid gear

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform the Electrical Pretest.

If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP C

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Repeat STEP A

256

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing.

3. Inspect the following:

• Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely

• Shift rails move into each gear position

• Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup

• Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time

If no problem found Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 72 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 72 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

257

Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures

Failed to Engage a Gear Fault

SA 3

SPN 520278

MID 130

SID 58

FMI 7

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails five consecutive attempts to engage a particular gear position.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Dragging Clutch- ECA- Shift Bar Housing- Electric Shifter- Gear Select Sensor- Yoke, Sliding Clutch, Mainshaft

- TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 73 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current position.

258

Failed to Engage a Gear Fault Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position.

259

Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Place Shift Device in Neutral.

4. Depress Service Brake.

5. Select Drive.

6. Observe gear display. If you have an active code 73 Go to STEP B

If Gear Display shows solid gear

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform the Electrical Pretest.

If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP C

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Repeat STEP A

260

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing.

3. Inspect the following:

• Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely.

• Electric Shifter is free from an excessive lube contamination build-up.

• Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time.

If no problem is found Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 73 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 73 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

261

Fault Code 74 Isolation Procedures

Engine Failed to Respond Fault (TECU)

SA 3

SPN 93, 190

MID 130

PID 93, 190

FMI 7

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) communicates with the Engine ECM over the J1939 data link during normal operation, however, engine control is accomplished by the engine Engine Control Module (ECM) during Hybrid mode. The TECU changes the mode to AutoShift Only or AutoShift Fallback mode. Then the TECU is directly requesting changes in engine speed and torque instead of the Hybrid Control Module (HCM).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• J1939 Communication Link Fault (TECU) not active.• J1939 Engine Message Fault (TECU) not active.• J1939 engine speed is greater than 300 RPM if the TECU is in speed control mode, or greater

than 1000 RPM if the TECU is in torque control mode.• Desired Engine Speed is less than J1939 engine configuration map speed.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 7 is set when the difference between actual engine percent torque and desired engine percent torque is greater than 50 for 2 continuous seconds, or when the difference between desired engine speed and actual engine speed is greater than 400 RPM for four continuous seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 7- Engine- Fuel System- Exhaust Back Pressure- Turbo charger- Air Intake/Filter Restriction- Un-reported engine loads

- Incorrect engine configuration settings for transmission assembly

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 74 is set the following conditions will occur:

262

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 74 Isolation Procedures

• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in the current gear position. Once the

vehicle is stopped, start and reverse gears can be engaged.• TECU changes to “Autoshift Fallback” mode.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Note: No schematic for this code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Retrieve codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If code 74 is active Contact the OEM because the engine is failing to respond to the transmissions command during a shift.

If code 74 is not active Test complete.

263

Fault Code 75 Isolation Procedures

Power Down in Gear Fault

SA 3

SPN 520276

MID 130

SID 60

FMI 14

Overview

The Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) is connected to the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) over the High Integrity Link (HIL) to communicate driver mode selection and fault status. At power-down the PBSC should be placed in “N” to perform the proper calibration sequence and to prevent a torque locked transmission.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The PBSC ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 14 is set when the TECU goes into the power-down sequence and a drive mode selection other than “N” is confirmed.

Possible Causes

• FMI 14

- Driver powered down in Non-neutral mode

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 75 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory only as an Inactive fault, since it only sets during the power-down sequence.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter

264

Isolation Procedures Fault Code 75 Isolation Procedures

• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on.

3. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If code 75 is inactive No action necessary, this code indicates the driver powered down the system prior to selecting neutral.

Note: Explain to driver, “N” must be selected on the Push Button Shift Control before powering down to prevent a stuck in gear situation and/ or a power-up no crank situation.

265

Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Battery Potential Voltage Fault

SA 239

SPN 520250

FMI 3, 4, 16, 18

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is greater than 417 volts for 240 ms.

• FMI 16 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is greater than 408 volts for 240 ms.

• FMI 4 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is less than 211 volts for 240 ms. • FMI 18 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is less than 240 volts for 240 ms.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3, 4- PEC- DC cable- DC interlock loop- Inverter- Service switch

- Inertia Switch

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 76 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will blink for FMI 4 and display solid for FMI 3, 16, 18• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

266

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

267

Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

Check to see if the red “Service Switch” on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on.

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Key on

3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

4. Key off

5. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

6. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 76 is listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 27, 28

Go to procedure for Fault Code 101 FMI 27 or 28 page 315

If Fault Code 76 is listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 29

Go to procedure for Fault Code 101 FMI 29 page 315

If Fault Code 76 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with no other active Hybrid Fault Codes

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

If Fault Code 76 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with other active Hybrid Fault Codes

Go to procedure for active Hybrid Fault Code(s).

If Fault Code 76 FMI 16 or 18 are listed

Test complete. FMIs 16 and 18 require no action or replacement.

IMPORTANT

WARNING

268

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 73 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 73 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

269

Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Battery Current Fault

SA 239

SPN 520232

FMI 6

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 6 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery current is greater than 200 amps for 1 second.

Possible Causes

• FMI 6

- PEC

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 78 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

270

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

271

Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. What Faults are present If Fault Code 78 is listed with an active Fault Code 113

Go to procedure for Fault Code 113, FMI 6 on page 369

If Fault Code 78 is listed with no Fault Code 113

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 78 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 78 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

WARNING

272

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures

273

Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Battery Temperature Fault

SA 239

SPN 520233

FMI 0, 16

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 0 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery temperature is greater than 70°C for 6.4 seconds.

• FMI 16 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery temperature is greater than 60°C for 6.4 seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 0- PEC- Battery Fan- Battery Fan Air Filter- Battery Fan Relay power supply harness- Battery Fan Relay

- Battery Fan Exhaust Screen

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 82 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display • Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Note: The conditions above are only present for FMI 0.

274

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

275

Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

26 86

87

85

30

Battery Fan

Typical Relay Switch

Battery Fan Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

4 Battery Fan Return

PEC

12

Ground 14

Battery Fan Supply

Cooling Fan Plus

Cooling Fan Minus

Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

3 4 5

6

7 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

17

18

19

276

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. What Faults are present. If Fault Code 82 FMI 0 is listed Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 82 FMI 16 is listed Test complete. FMI 16 requires no action or replacement.

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Remove and inspect the Air filter on the PEC inlet and the exhaust screen on the PEC outlet.

If the air filter and screen are clean and free from debris

Go to STEP C

If the air filter is dirty or the exhaust screen is plugged

Replace the Air Filter and clean the Exhaust Screen. Go to STEP V

WARNING

277

Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab.

3. Key on.

4. Go to “Product Tests” and select Battery Fan Relay.

5. Check for airflow from the front and rear air ports in the PEC.

If airflow can be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust

Go to STEP E

If airflow can not be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust

Go to STEP D

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Disconnect the 19-way connector at the PEC.

3. Measure voltage at the 19-way connector from pin 12 to pin 14.

If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is outside of range

Repair Battery Fan Relay circuit. Refer to OEM.

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Is fault code 105 FMI 29 listed active

Fault code 105 FMI 29 is active Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

Fault code 105 FMI 29 is not active

Using ServiceRanger go to “Advanced Product Functions” menu and select the HCM option. Download the Snapshot file and contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

278

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 82 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 82 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

279

Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures

Invalid Shift Range

SA 3

SPN 751

SID 18

PID 18

FMI 12, 13

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift devices are the Eaton® Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured.

Conditions to Set Fault

• Fault Code 83 is set when redundant sensor voltages do not agree.

Possible Causes

• Faulty Sensors• Harness• TECU

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 83 is set the following conditions will occur:

• A “F” will show in the gear display• Fault is stored in TECU memory• TECU changes to “AutoShift” control• The engine will not crank

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

280

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

281

Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the 4-way connector to the park pawl actuator.

2. Key on.

3. Check for 24V supply at 4-pin connector at pins 1 and 2.

If voltage between pins 1 and 2 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Go to STEP B

If voltage is outside the range Go to STEP D

Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Park PawlActuator

3

1

4

2

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

17

16

15

31

Shift Return (Minus)

Shift Control Input 1

Shift Control (Plus)

Shift Control Input 2

TECU

2

3

4

1

4-Pin Park Pawl ActuatorConnector

282

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. With the actuator/shift lever in the Neutral position check voltage on pins:

• 3 to ground• 4 to ground

If voltage is between 2.25V and 2.75 V

Go to STEP C

If voltage is outside the range Replace Sensor. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

2. Check continuity between:

• 38-way connector pin 15 and 4-pin connector pin 4

• 38-way connector pin 16 and 4-pin connector pin 3

If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector.

2. Check continuity between:

• 38-way connector pin 17 and 4-pin connector pin 1

• 38-way connector pin 31 and 4-pin connector pin 2

If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V

If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V

283

Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 83 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 83 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

284

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures

285

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

Shift Control Device Not Configured Fault

SA 3

SPN 751

MID 130

SID 18

FMI 13, 14

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift device is the Eaton® Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up.

Note: This fault code will only be set active.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active.• The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 13 is set when the TECU powers-up the first time and fails to recognize any valid shift device connected to the vehicle within five seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 13• OEM Wiring Harness between TECU and shift control device is disconnected• PBSC• FMI 14• OEM Wiring Harness between TECU and shift control device is disconnected• Shift Lever

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 84 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The “Service” lamp may or may not come on depending on the failure.• Fault is stored in TECU memory.• TECU changes to “AutoShift Fallback” mode.• The engine will not crank.

286

Shift Control Device Not Configured Fault Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

287

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

Harness Front View(Push Button Shift Control 30-Way Connector)

ABCDEFGHJK

1

2

3

A1

A3

K1

K3

TECU PBSC

28

27 F2

F1

31

25 J3

C1

B3

HIL High

HIL Low

Shift Power (Plus)

Shift Return (Minus)

HIL High

HIL Low

Shift Power (Plus)

Shift Return (Minus)

VDash Dimmer

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Shift LeverController

3

1

4

2

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

Park Pawl Actuator

17

16

15

31

Shift Return (Minus)

Shift Control Input 1

Shift Control (Plus)

Shift Control Input 2

TECU

2

3

4

1

4-Pin Park Pawl ActuatorConnector

288

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key on and observe the Push Button “Service” lamp

If red “Service” lamp comes on Go to STEP B

If red “Service” lamp does not turn on

Go to STEP C

If FMI 14 is present Call 1-800-826-HELP (4357). Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off and on while observing the green mode lamps on the PBSC

If green “Mode” lamps turn on Go to STEP F

If green “Mode” lamps do not turn on

Replace PBSC. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the PBSC 30-way connector

3. Key on.

4. Measure the voltage between pins J3 and C1 on the 30-way connector

If voltage is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage

Replace the PBSC. Go to STEP V

If voltage is out of range Go to STEP D

289

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between pin J3 on the shift control 30-way connector and the pin 25 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector

If resistance between pins J3 and pin 25 is 0-0.3 ohms

Go to STEP E

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the following:

• Pin C1 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 31 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector

• Pin C1 on the shift control and ground

If resistance between pins C1 and pin 25 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin C1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

290

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the shift control 30-way connector

3. Key on.

4. Measure the AC voltage between pins F1 and F2

If voltage is 0.1 volts AC or greater

Replace the push button shift control (PBSC). Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the meter is on the AC auto feature or set to the AC 10 volts scale

If voltage is 0.1 volts AC or less Go to STEP G

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the following:

• Pin F1 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 28 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector

• Pin F1 on the shift control 30-way connector and ground

If resistance between pins F1 and pin 28 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Go to STEP H

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

291

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance between the following:

• Pin F2 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 27 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector

• Pin F2 on the shift control 30-way connector and ground

If resistance between pins F2 and pin 27 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F2 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V

292

Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 84 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 84 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

293

Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures

Shift Control Device Incompatible Fault

SA 3

SPN 639

MID 130

SID 18

FMI 12

Overview

The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of PBSC device during the first power-up to determine, if a compatible model is being used.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active• The HIL Link Fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 12 is set anytime the TECU powers-up and detects a non-compatible shift control device, or it does not receive a component I.D. ten seconds after power-up.

Possible Causes

• FMI 12

- Shift Control Device

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 85 is set the following conditions will occur:

• Fault is stored in TECU memory• TECU changes to “AutoShift Fallback” mode• The engine will not crank.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit

294

Shift Control Device Incompatible Fault Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures

• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

295

Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Select the Roadranger Configurations menu and view the Transmission selection.

3. View the Push-button Type field for one of the following options:

• EARNDM = Used with EH-8E306A-UPG transmissions (shown on transmission tag)

• ERNDM = Used with EH-8E306A-UP transmissions (shown on transmission tag)

• RNDML = Used with EH-8E306A-CD and EH-8E306A-U transmissions (shown on transmission tag)

If the Push-button Type field matches the push-button installed in the vehicle

Go to STEP B

If the Push-button Type field does not match the push-button installed in the vehicle

Change the Push-button Type Field or Push-button to match the transmission model number shown on the transmission tag. Use Step A.3. to determine correct push-button for each model.

296

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. View the Hybrid Control Module selection under the Roadranger Configurations option in ServiceRanger.

2. View the System Configuration field for one of the following options:

• UPG = Used in EH-8E306A-UPG transmission

• UP = Used in EH-8E306A-UP transmissions

• CD or U = Used in EH-8E306A-CD and EH-8E306A-U transmissions

3. Compare the HCM System Configurations selection to the TECU Push-button Type selection.

If HCM System Configuration and TECU Push-button Type are the same

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

If HCM System Configuration and TECU Push-button Type are different

Install a HCM with the correct configuration to match the transmission tag. Go to STEP V

297

Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 85 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 85 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

298

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures

299

Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures

Inverter CAN Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 520223

FMI 2, 9

Overview

The Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) and the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the Controller Area Network (CAN) high-speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The HCM CAN data link fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM has not received a Inverter message for 30 consecutive message cycles.

• FMI 2 is only active in Product Diagnostic Mode and will set if 3 consecutive Inverter messages are not received by the HCM.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 9, 2- Inverter

- CAN data link

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 88 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

300

Connector Views Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

27

28

5

4

HCM Inverter

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

301

Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest.

If no issues are found during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. Disconnect Inverter 40-way connector

4. Measure resistance between Inverter 40-way connector pins 5 and 4

If resistance between pins 5 and 4 is between 50-70 ohms

Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale)

If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V

WARNING

302

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 88 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 88 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

303

Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures

Battery Control Unit CAN Message Fault (HCM)

SA 239

SPN 520234

FMI 2, 9

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) communicate with the Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) and the HCM on the Controller Area Network (CAN) high-speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The HCM CAN data link fault is not active.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 2 is only active in Product Diagnostic Mode and will set if 3 consecutive BCU messages are not received by the HCM.

• FMI 9 is set when the HCM has not received a BCU 1 message for 30 consecutive message cycles.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 2, 9- Inverter- CAN data link from PEC to Inverter

- PEC

Fallback Mode When Faults is Set

When Fault Code 89 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

304

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

305

Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

27

28

5

4

HCM Inverter

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

PEC Harness Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way)

8 9

1

2

345

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

35

34

2

1

PEC

CAN - High

CAN - Low

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

306

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest.

If no issues are found during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. Disconnect PEC 19-way connector

4. Measure resistance between PEC 19-way connector pins 1 and 2

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale)

If resistance between pin 1 and 2 is between 50-70 ohms

Replace the Battery Control Unit (BCU). Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C

WARNING

307

Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect Inverter 40-way connector.

2. Measure resistance between:

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 35 and PEC 19-way connector pin 2.

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 34 and PEC 19-way connector 1.

If resistance between pin 35 and 2 is between 0-0.2 ohms, and resistance between 34 and 1 is between 0-0.2 ohms

Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V

Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale)

If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness between Inverter and PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 89 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 89 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

308

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures

309

Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures

24-volt Cranking Relay Fault

SA 239

SPN 520249

FMI 3, 4

Overview

The 24-volt Cranking Relay is wired into the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the coil side of the relay. At key on, the HCM determines the starting method (High-Voltage Motor/Generator, or Engine Starter) to use. If the HCM uses the Motor/Generator to start the engine, the clutch is closed, the 24-volt cranking relay is de-energized, which disconnects the main battery power supply to the Start Enable Relay. If the HCM decides to use the standard engine starter, the 24-volt Cranking Relay is energized suppling battery power to the Start Enable Relay main feed, which then powers the starter solenoid.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• Engine speed is 0 RPM or unknown

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 if the HCM detects am open or short to vbatt in the control circuit of the 24-volt cranking relay for 1 second or greater.

• FMI 4 is set if the HCM detects a short to ground in the control circuit of the 24-volt cranking relay for 1 second or greater.

Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3,4 - Vehicle harness from HCM to 24-volt Cranking Relay- 24-volt Cranking Relay

- HCM

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 95 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• If the fault sets at power-up the engine will crank, provided the high-voltage batteries have a

sufficient State of Charge (SOC). • If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to operate

310

Connector Views Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter• ServiceRanger

Connector Views

HCM

30

86

87 85

32 86

87

85

Crank Enable Plus

Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Typical Relay Switch

12-Volt Cranking Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

4 Crank Enable Minus

26 Crank Enable Latch

AutoShift Start Enable Relay (30)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

311

Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Swap the 24V cranking relay with another relay and see if the fault returns

If the fault does not return with new relay

Replace 24V cranking relay. Go to STEP V

If the fault returns with new relay

Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. What FMIs were listed from Step A.

If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP C

Note: The 24-volt Cranking Relay must be wired according to Eaton® Hybrid requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic.

If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector

4. Measure the resistance between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4

If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms

Go to STEP D

If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V

312

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Measure voltage between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground at key on.

If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 5 volts

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active).Go to STEP V

If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts

Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go toSTEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect negative battery cable.

3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector.

4. Measure voltage between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground.

If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater

Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active).Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V

313

Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 95 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 95 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

314

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures

315

Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Battery Fault

SA 239

SPN 520238

FMI 0, 22 - 31

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 0,22-31 are set for various internal High-Voltage Battery failures.

Possible Causes

• FMI 0, 22-31

- PEC

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 101 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 0• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 22-29• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Depending on the FMI the Inverter or HCM shuts the high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

316

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

317

Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow the “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage.

4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 101, FMI 27 or 28 are listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 26

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 101, FMI 27 or 28 are not listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 26

Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 101 FMI 22-25 are listed

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 101 FMI 29 is listed

Go to STEP C

If Fault Code 101 FMI 30 or 31 are listed

Test complete. FMI’s 30 and 31 require no action or replacement.

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. View the Data Monitor parameter PID 133 “Battery SOC”

If PID 133 “Battery SOC” is less than 80 percent

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If PID 133 “Battery SOC” is greater than 80 percent

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

WARNING

318

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. View the Data Monitor parameter PID 133 “Battery SOC”

If PID 133 “Battery SOC” is greater than 10 percent

Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If PID 133 “Battery SOC” is less than 10 percent

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 101 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 101 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

319

Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures

Battery Control Unit Communication Fault

SA 239

SPN 520265

FMI 22 - 26

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries each contain a cell controller that communicates over a twisted pair data link to the Battery Control Unit (BCU). The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 22 is set when the BCU fails to communicate over the CAN data link for 30 ms. • FMI 23 is set when the BCU fails to receive HCM data over the CAN data link for 2.5 seconds

or greater after communication is established.• FMI 24 is set when the BCU fails to receive Inverter data over the CAN data link for 2.5

seconds or greater after communication is established.• FMI 25 is set when the BCU fails to transmit anything over the data link for 2 seconds.• FMI 26 is set when the BCU detects an error on initial check.

Possible Causes

• FMI 26- Relay box

• FMI 22, 25- Relay box- CAN data link between PEC and Inverter

• FMI 23- Relay box- CAN data link between PEC and HCM

• FMI 24- Relay box- Inverter

- CAN data link between PEC and Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 103 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory

320

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures

• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

321

Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

27

28

5

4

HCM Inverter

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

Front Harness View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

345

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

35

34

2

1

PEC

CAN - High

CAN - Low

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

322

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Key on

3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

4. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest

If no issues are found during either Electrical Test

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during either Electrical Test

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. What Faults are present If Fault Code 103 FMI 26 is listed Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 103 FMI 22, 23, 24, or 25 are listed with an active fault code 111

Go to procedure for Fault Code 111 on page 357

If fault code 88 or 89 are listed Go to procedure for Fault Code 88 on page 299 or 89 on page 303

WARNING

323

Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 103 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 103 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

324

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures

325

Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures

Battery Control Unit Fault

SA 239

SPN 520240

FMI 22 - 30

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries each contain a cell controller that communicates over a twisted pair data link to the Battery Control Unit (BCU). The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, State of Charge (SOC), and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 22-30 are set for various internal Battery Control Unit failures.

Possible Causes

• FMI 22-30

- Relay box

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 105 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off • HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

326

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

327

Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

2. Key off.

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 105, FMI 23-29 is listed

Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 105, FMI 30 is listed Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 105, FMI 22 is listed Key off and back on. If fault is still present at key on, Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

WARNING

328

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the AC high-voltage connector at the Motor / Generator

3. With the AC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at all three terminals. Note: Cable should be flexed while measuring

If Open or “OL” on meter Replace PEC

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace AC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

329

Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 105 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 105 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

330

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures

331

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Battery Leak Detection Fault

SA 239

SPN 520242

FMI 1

Overview

The Battery Control Unit (BCU) continuously monitors the vehicle to detect a high-voltage leak. The circuit is connected to 3 locations on the DC high-voltage line with the opposite end connected to the chassis through a resistor.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.• The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 1 is set when resistance between high-voltage cable and inverter case is less than 82k ohms for 1.2 seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 1- High-voltage cable insulation damage

- High-voltage component leaking

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 107 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708

332

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

• ServiceRanger• Megatest Meter AMB-45

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

333

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

If fault code 107 is active Go to STEP B

If fault code 107 is inactive Test complete. Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. Disconnect the Inverter DC connector at the PEC

4. Measure the resistance to shield at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP I

If any resistance/continuity is found

Go to STEP C

WARNING

334

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the DC connector at the Inverter

3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends measure the resistance to cable shielding at both the positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP D

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace DC high-voltage cable between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V

WARNING

335

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Measure the resistance to ground at the Inverter DC connector on both positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Go to STEP E

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the AC connector at the Inverter

3. Measure the resistance to ground on all three terminals at the AC cable

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP F

If any resistance/continuity is found

Go to STEP G

WARNING

WARNING

336

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Measure the resistance to ground at all three terminals at the Inverter AC connector

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V

WARNING

337

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the AC high-voltage connector at the Motor/Generator

3. With the AC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at all three terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP H

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace AC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

338

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Measure the resistance to ground at the Motor/Generator AC connector

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

STEP I

Procedure Condition Action

1. Is unit supplied with a DC/DC converter or APG?

Yes Go to STEP J

No Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

WARNING

339

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP J

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect 24V positive and negative cables from DC/DC converter

3. Disconnect the PEC to DC/DC converter DC cable at the PEC

4. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error in testing. Go to STEP V if vehicle does not have an APG. Go to STEP M if vehicle is equipped with APG

If any resistance/continuity is found

Go to STEP K

WARNING

340

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP K

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the high-voltage DC cable at the DC/DC converter

3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP L

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace High Voltage DC Cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

341

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP L

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC/DC Converter high-voltage DC connector at both positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace DC/DC Converter. Go to STEP V

WARNING

342

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP M

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the APG DC high-voltage cable at the PEC

3. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals

If Open or “OL” on meter Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Go to STEP N

WARNING

343

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP N

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Disconnect the high-voltage DC cable at the APG

3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends measure the resistance from positive and negative terminals to cable shielding at PEC cable end

If Open or “OL” on meter Go to STEP O

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace DC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

344

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

STEP O

Procedure Condition Action

1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

2. Measure the resistance to ground at APG high-voltage DC connector pins 1(+) and 4(-)

If Open or “OL” on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V

If any resistance/continuity is found

Replace APG. Go to STEP V

WARNING

345

Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on.

4. Clear codes. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 107 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 107 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

346

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures

347

Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures

Battery Control Unit Power Supply Fault

SA 239

SPN 520268

FMI 3, 4

Overview

The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box receives 24-volts ignition power and ground from the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when the BCU detects the Inverter enable voltage is greater than 16 volts for 1 second.

• FMI 4 is set when the BCU detects the Inverter enable voltage is less than 7 volts for 1 second.

Possible Causes

• FMI 4- Relay Box- Low-voltage harness from Inverter to PEC- HCM- Low-voltage harness from HCM to Inverter- Inverter

• FMI 3

- Relay Box

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 108 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

348

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

349

Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Inverter

Ground BC

VB_B

19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

3 4 5

6

7 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

17

18

19

14

15

6

7

PEC

Ground BC

VB_B

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

HCM

Inverter Enable 2 9 Inverter Enable

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

350

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Key off

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

4. What Faults are present If Fault Code 108 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with an active Fault Code 114

Go to procedure for Fault Code 114 on page 375

If Fault Code 108 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with no active Fault Code 114

Go to STEP B

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector.

2. Connect a multi meter to the PEC 19-way connector pin 6 and pin 7.

3. Place multimeter where it can be viewed, while standing next to the truck.

4. Key on.

5. Observe multi meter voltage reading.

If voltage between pins 6 and 7 is 23 to 25 volts

Replace the Battery Control Unit. Go to STEP V

If voltage between pins 6 and 7 is less than 7 volts

Go to STEP C

WARNING

351

Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

3. Measure resistance on the following:

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 14 to PEC 19-way connector pin 6.

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 15 to PEC 19-way connector pin 7.

If resistance from pin 14 to pin 6 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance from pin 15 to pin 7 is 0 to 0.3 ohms

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the low-voltage harness from the PEC to the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 108 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 108 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

352

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures

353

Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Fault

SA 239

SPN 520220

FMI 21 - 29

Overview

The Inverter assembly is connected to the high-voltage DC cable from the PEC along with the high-voltage AC cable from the Motor/Generator. It inverts the DC to AC voltage to power the motor during electric assist and rectifies the AC back to DC to charge the high-voltage batteries during coasting or regenerative braking. The Inverter is also the main controller for the high-voltage system communicating to the Battery Control Module in the PEC along with communicating to the HCM for overall system operation.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 21-29 are set due to various internal failures of the Inverter.

Possible Causes

• FMI 21-29

- Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 110 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Depending on the internal failure the Inverter may continue to operate with the fault logged, or

shutdown the high- voltage system.• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode for most failures.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

354

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

355

Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Key off

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

4. What FMI’s are present If Fault Code 110 is active Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 110 is inactive Test complete

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 110 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 110 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

WARNING

356

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures

357

Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Communication Fault

SA 239

SPN 520260

FMI 12, 19, 22- 28

Overview

The Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the PEC and the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the CAN high-speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 12 or 19 are set when the CAN message does not match or EEPROM check sum error occurs at system power up.

• FMI 22 is set when Inverter detects an internal CAN communication failure at power-up.• FMI 23, 24, 25, 27, or 28 are set when the Inverter fails to transmit, receive or obtain any

messages on the CAN data link.• FMI 26 is set when a specific message sent from the HCM is invalid.

Possible Causes

• FMI 22 - Inverter

• FMI 23, 24, or 25 - CAN data link - Inverter- Relay Box

• FMI 26 - HCM

• FMI 27- Vehicle Harness- Relay Box- Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 111 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber "Check Hybrid" lamp will display.• Fault is stored in HCM memory.• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered.

358

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures

• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode.• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st.

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

359

Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

27

28

5

4

HCM Inverter

CAN - High (Vehicle)

CAN - Low (Vehicle)

CAN - High

CAN - Low

Harness Front View(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low-Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

345

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

35

34

2

1

PEC

CAN - High

CAN - Low

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

360

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Key on

3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

4. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest

If no issues are found during either Electrical Test

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during either Electrical Test

Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Follow “Hybrid Shutdown Procedure,” found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. What FMI’s are present for active fault 111

If FMI 22 is listed Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If FMI 26 is listed Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If FMI 12, 23, 24, 25, 28 are listed Go to procedure for Fault Code 88

If FMI 27 is listed Go to STEP C

If FMI 19 is listed Go to STEP D

WARNING

361

Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Remove 40-pin connector at the Inverter

3. Check for short to ground and 24-volt at pins 34 and 35

Short found to ground or 24V Replace the Vehicle Harness. Go to STEP V

No short or open circuit found and there is an active fault 103 FMI 26

Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

No short or open circuits found Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Key off and allow the system to power down for at least 2 minutes.

3. Turn key to the on position If fault code 111 FMI 9 is not active

Test complete. Go to STEP V

If fault code 111 FMI 9 is active Go to STEP E

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Remove the 40 pin connector at the Inverter

3. Measure the voltage at Pin 1 If voltage at PIn 1 is 0 Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If voltage at Pin 1 is the same as the battery voltage

Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

362

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 111 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 111 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

363

Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Voltage Fault

SA 239

SPN 520221

FMI 3, 4

Overview

The Inverter is connected to the Power Electronics Carrier through a high-voltage DC cable, which supplies 340 volts from the batteries. During operation, the Inverter monitors the input voltage to determine an over or under voltage concern.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 4 is set when the Inverter input voltage measured at the capacitor is less than 200 volts for 1 second, while the main relays in the Relay Box are on.

• FMI 3 is set when the Inverter input voltage measured at the capacitor is greater than 435 volts for 0.05 ms.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3,4 - Inverter- PEC- DC high-voltage cable

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 112 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

364

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

365

Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Inverter

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-)

DC (+)

DC (-)

DC (+)

PEC

High Voltage DC Connector View(Yazaki Connector)

1 2

DC(+) DC(-)

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

High-Voltage DC Connector to PEC

DC(+) DC(-)

366

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Key on

3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

4. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

5. What Faults are present If Fault Code 112 FMI 3 is listed Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357).

If Fault Code 112, FMI 3 is listed with other active Hybrid Fault Codes beside 112

Go to procedure for active Hybrid Fault Code(s).

If Fault Code 112 FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP B

WARNING

367

Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the DC high-voltage connector at the Inverter

3. Place the multi-meter on uF option

4. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

5. Place the leads into the two Inverter DC high-voltage sockets making sure the probes touch the terminals

6. Record the measurement after 2 minutes

If the uF reading is 1104uF-1656uF at 68°F (20°C)

Go to STEP C

If the uF reading is outside 1104uF-1656uF at 68°F (20°C)

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the DC high-voltage connector from the PEC

3. Measure the resistance of each circuit on the DC cable from the PEC connector to the Inverter connector

If the resistance for each circuit is 1 ohm or less

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is out of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

WARNING

368

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 112 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 112 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

369

Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Current Fault

SA 239

SPN 520222

FMI 6, 14

Overview

The Inverter is connected to the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) through a high-voltage DC cable which supplies 340 volts from the batteries. During operation, the Inverter monitors the output current to the Motor/Generator.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 6 is set when the Inverter IGBT current is greater than 800 amps for 0.05 ms or the motor cable is short.

• FMI 14 is set when motor torque commanded is zero and current is reported by the Inverter.

Possible Causes

• FMI 6 - Inverter- Motor/Generator- AC high-voltage cables

• FMI 14- Motor/Generator- AC high-voltage cables

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 113 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will display for FMI 6 and a amber Check Hybrid for FMI 14• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

370

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

371

Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

W

V

U

W

V

U

Inverter Motor/Generator

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector)

W U

V

E D

FU

V

WF

E D

D

E

D

E

Loose Disconnect

Loose Disconnect

Loose Disconnect

Loose Disconnect

372

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Key off

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

4. What FMI(s) are present If Fault Code 113 FMI 6 is listed Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 113 FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP D

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Visually inspect the AC cable for signs of abrasion, cuts, or exposed wiring

2. Remove the AC high-voltage cable at the Motor/Generator and Inverter

3. Measure the resistance between the following AC high-voltage cable pins:

• U-V• V-W• W-U

If resistance between each phase is 5M or greater

Go to STEP C

An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Harness. Go to STEP V

WARNING

373

Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Measure the resistance of each AC high-voltage cable pin to ground

If resistance between each pin and ground is 5M or greater

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Remove the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter and Motor/Generator

2. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins:

• U-U• V-V• W-W

If resistance is less than 1 ohm on each circuit

Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V

Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used

If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Harness. Go to STEP V

374

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 113 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 113 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

375

Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Power Supply Fault

SA 239

SPN 520261

FMI 1, 3, 4

Overview

The Inverter assembly uses a 24-volt supply provided from the HCM to power the internal control board. The HCM provides this ignition power after it completes the power-up self check.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 1 is set when the internal 24v to 12v converter is out of range.• FMI 3 is set when the Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 16 volts (12-volt system) and 32

volts (24-volt system) for 0.5 seconds. • FMI 4 is set when the Inverter ignition voltage is less than 7 volts (12-volt system) and 16 volts

(24-volt system) for 0.1 seconds.

Possible Causes

• FMI 1- Inverter

• FMI 3 - Inverter

• FMI 4- HCM- Inverter

- Power supply harness from HCM to Inverter

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 114 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regeneration are disabled, however, the high-voltage

relays will remain powered• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

376

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

377

Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP B

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Test Complete. Go to STEP V

2

7

9

6

HCM Inverter

Inverter Enable

Ground 1

Inverter Enable

Ground 2

Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

378

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Key off

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

If FMI 1 is listed Replace the Inverter

4. What FMI’s are present If Fault Code 114 FMI 3 or 4 is listed

Go to STEP C

If Fault Code 114 is not present Test Complete. Go to STEP V

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector

3. Connect a multi meter to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 and pin 6

4. Place multi meter where it can be viewed while standing next to the truck

5. Key on

6. Observe multi meter voltage reading

If voltage is 23 to 25 volts (24-volt system)

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If voltage is greater than 32 volts (24-volt system)

Repair the vehicle charging system. Refer to OEM for repair procedure.

If voltage is outside of range Go to STEP D

WARNING

379

Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable

3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector

4. Measure resistance from the following:

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 to HCM 38-way connector pin 2.

• Inverter 40-way connector pin 6 to ground.

If resistance from pin 1 to pin 2 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance from pin 6 to ground is 0 to OL

Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the open in the power or ground harness. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 114 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 114 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

380

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures

381

Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures

Inverter Temperature Fault

SA 239

SPN 520223

FMI 0

Overview

The Inverter temperature sensor is a thermistor located inside the Inverter that changes in value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Inverter temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.1 volts equals 127°C). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.0 volts equal -56°C).

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 0 is set with the Inverter temperature is greater than 97°C (206°F) for 100 ms or sensor broken.

Possible Causes

• FMI 0- Inverter- Liquid cooling system (low coolant, no coolant flow, coolant pump, radiator,

radiator fan, reservoir)

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 115 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will

remain powered• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools

382

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures

• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Note: No Schematic for this Code.

Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature.

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

383

Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. Key on

4. Select the Data Monitor option and view PID 120 “Inverter Temperature” in the “Power Electronics” list

5. Observe PID 120 again after 20 minutes

If PID 120 “Inverter Temperature” lowered from the first to second reading

Go to STEP B

If PID 120 “Inverter Temperature” remained constant

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Observe the coolant level after the system has cooled to see if it is filled to the proper level

If the coolant is within the recommend limits

Go to STEP C

If the coolant is below the recommended limits

Refer to OEM for coolant type and fill procedure. Go to STEP V

WARNING

384

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Visually inspect the Hybrid liquid cooling system radiator for debris or obstruction to airflow and inspect the coolant lines for sharp bends

If the radiator is free of debris and the coolant lines are not kinked

Go to STEP D

If the radiator is full of debris, the airflow is obstructed, or the coolant lines are kinked

Repair the concern. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way connector in the cab

3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Cooling Pump” option.

4. Enable the Cooling Pump option

If the coolant pump turns on Go to STEP E

If the coolant pump fails to turn on Go to STEP F

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Heat Exchanger Fan” option.

2. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option

If the Heat Exchanger Fan turns on

The system needs to be purged of air to allow the coolant to flow. Bleed the air by using a coolant system pressurizing tool or a vacuum tool. Go to STEP V

If the Heat Exchanger Fan fails to turns on

Go to STEP G

385

Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Disconnect the Coolant Pump 2-way connector

3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Cooling Pump” option

4. Enable the Cooling Pump option

5. Measure the voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B.

If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump concern

If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range

Refer to OEM for Cooing Pump power harness repair procedure.

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Disconnect the Heat Exchanger Fan 2-way connector

3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the “Heat Exchanger Fan” option

4. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option

5. Measure the voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B.

If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage

Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan concern

If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range

Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan power harness repair procedure

386

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 115 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 115 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

387

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Relays Fault

SA 239

SPN 521210, 521211, 521212

FMI 3, 4, 5

Overview

The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. There is one pre-charge relay on the positive side, an additional relay on the positive, and one on the negative for a total of three. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when a short is detected to vehicle 24 volt on the control side of a high-voltage relay.

• FMI 4 is set when a short is detected to ground on the control side of a high-voltage relay. • FMI 5 is set when an open circuit is detected on the control side of a high-voltage relay.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3, 4, 5- Relay Box- Inertia Switch- Inverter- Vehicle wiring between the Inverter and PEC

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 116 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will blink for FMI 10• Fault is stored in HCM memory• The hybrid system will be offline• Transmission defaults to 1st start gear in diesel only mode

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

388

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

389

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Inverter

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-)

DC (+)

DC (-)

DC (+)

PEC

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way)

8 9

1

2

3

45

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

1

2

1

2Interlock negative

Interlock positive

Interlock negative

Interlock positive

21

22

17

9

23

32

13

11

33

31

15

19

Precharge Plus

Main Plus Plus

Precharge Minus

Main Minus Minus

Main Plus Minus

Main Minus Plus

Precharge Plus

Main Plus Plus

Precharge Minus

Main Minus Minus

Main Plus Minus

Main Minus Plus

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

390

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

3. What FMI’s are present If Fault Code 116 FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 116 FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP D

If Fault Code 116 FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP F

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the 'Service Switch' out

3. Disconnect the PEC 19-pin connector

4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN:

a. SPN 521210; pins 17 and 19 to 24-volt

b. SPN 521211; pins 9 and 11 to 24-volt

c. SPN 521212; pins 13 and 15 to 24-volt

Any resistance from PEC connector pins to 24-volt

Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Go to STEP C

WARNING

391

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Connect the PEC 19-pin connector

3. Disconnect the 40-pin Inverter connector

4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN:

a. SPN 521210; pins 21 and 31 to 24-volt

b. SPN 521211; pins 22 and 32 to 24-volt

c. SPN 521212; pins 23 and 33 to 24-volt

Any resistance from the Inverter connector pins to 24-volt

Repair vehicle harness. Go to STEP V

If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the “Service Switch” out.

4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN:

a. SPN 521210; pin 17 to ground

b. SPN 521211; pin 9 to ground

c. SPN 521212; pin 13 to ground

Any resistance from the PEC connectors to ground

Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Go to STEP E

392

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN:

a. SPN 521210; pin 21 to ground

b. SPN 521211; pin 22 to ground

c. SPN 521212; pin 23 to ground

Any resistance from the Inverter connectors to ground

Repair vehicle harness. Go to STEP V

If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Ensure the key is in the Off position

4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out

5. Measure resistance at the PEC 19-way connector terminal at the following pins:

• SPN 521210; pins 17 to 19

• SPN 521211; pins 9 to 11

• SPN 521212; pins 13 to 15

If the resistance between pins 17 and 19 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 9 to 11 and pin 13 to 15 are each 33-37 ohms

Go to STEP G

If resistance is out of range Reset inertia switch if Pin 13 to 15 is open or OL, retest circuit. Replace PEC if circuit is still open after switch reset or the other circuits are out of range. Go to STEP V

393

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Connect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-pin connector

4. Ensure the key is in the Off position

5. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out

6. Measure resistance at the Inverter 40-way connector terminal at the following pins:

• SPN 521210; pins 21 to 31

• SPN 521211; pins 23 to 33

• SPN 521212; pins 22 to 32

If the resistance between pins 21 and 31 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 23 to 33 and pin 22 to 32 are each 33-37 ohms

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable.

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete.

If code 116 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

If code other than 116 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

394

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

395

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

High Voltage Relays Fault

SA 239

SPN 520224

FMI 10, 14, 20, 29, 30

Overview

The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. There is one pre-charge relay on the positive side, an additional relay on the positive, and one on the negative for a total of three. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 10 is set when inverter capacitor voltage is less than 210 volts after 4 seconds from pre-charge relay being closed or main positive relay is not on.

• FMI 14 is set when the main negative relay is on and the inverter capacitor voltage decrease is less than 10-volts / 5 seconds when initial capacitor voltage was greater than 200 volts and motor speed is less than 500 RPM.

• FMI 20 is set when the high-voltage DC cable interlock switch is open. • FMI 29 is set when battery voltage is present on the Inverter side of the main relays under

Main Positive Relay open status.• FMI 30 is set when battery voltage is present on the Inverter side of the main relays under

Main Negative Relay open status.

Possible Causes

• FMI 10- High-voltage fuse- Red Service Switch- DC high-voltage cable or interlock- Inverter- Inertia switch

• FMI 14- Inverter- PEC

• FMI 20- DC cable interlock circuit

• FMI 29- Failed Main Positive relay

• FMI 30- Failed Main Negative relay

396

High Voltage Relays Fault Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 116 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will be illuminated for FMI 10, 14 and 20. The Red “Stop Hybrid” lamp will be illuminated for FMI 29 and 30.

• Fault is stored in HCM memory• The hybrid system will be offline• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st in diesel only mode

Conditions to Clear the Fault

Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive.

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

397

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Warnings and Cautions

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

398

Connector Views Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

Connector Views

Inverter

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-)

DC (+)

DC (-)

DC (+)

PEC

340-Volt Pos (High Voltage)

340-Volt Neg (High Voltage)

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way)

8 9

1

2

3

45

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

1

2

1

2Interlock negative

Interlock positive

Interlock negative

Interlock positive

21

22

17

9

23

32

13

11

33

31

15

19

Precharge Plus

Main Plus Plus

Precharge Minus

Main Minus Minus

Main Plus Minus

Main Minus Plus

Precharge Plus

Main Plus Plus

Precharge Minus

Main Minus Minus

Main Plus Minus

Main Minus Plus

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

399

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

Fault Isolation Procedures

Check to see if the red “Service Switch” on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on.

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Check to see if the red “Service Switch” on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on

3. What FMI’s are present If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is listed Go to STEP B

If Fault Code 116 FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP I

If Fault Code 116 FMI 20 is listed Go to STEP J

If Fault Code 116 FMI 29 or 30 is listed

Go to STEP K

IMPORTANT

WARNING

400

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Remove the PEC air filter cover

3. Reset the PEC Inertia Switch (see TRSM2000 for procedures)

4. Key on

5. Retrieve active fault codes and FMI’s with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector.

If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is now active

Go to STEP V

If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is still listed

Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way diagnostic connector in the cab

3. Select the “Data Monitor” option and view Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) from the HV Battery list

if Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) is greater than 210 volts

Go to STEP D

if Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) is less than 210 volts

Check main fuse in the PEC. If fuse has not failed replace PEC. Go to STEP V

401

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a DC/DC Converter or APG skip to Step E

3. Using high-voltage gloves disconnect the DC cable for the DC/DC Converter or APG at the PEC bulkhead and cap the connector and the bulkhead terminal

4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out.

5. Key on If fault code 116 FMI 10 is active with the DC/DC Converter and APG connector disconnected

Go to STEP E

If fault code 116 FMI 10 is not active with the DC/DC Converter and APG connector disconnected

Replace the Auxiliary Relays in the PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the DC high-voltage cable at the PEC and the Inverter

3. Measure the of each high-voltage circuit on the cable

Resistance of each circuit is 0 - 0.3 ohms

Go to STEP F

If resistance is outside of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

402

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Ensure the key is in the Off position

4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out

5. Measure resistance at the PEC 19-way connector terminal at the following pins:

• Pins 17 to 19• Pins 9 to 11• Pins 13 to 15

If the resistance between pins 17 and 19 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 9 to 11 and pin 13 to 15 are each 33-37 ohms

Go to STEP G

If resistance is out of range Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP G

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Connect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-pin connector

4. Inspect the connectors for damage or corrosion

5. Ensure the key is in the Off position

6. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out

7. Measure resistance at the Inverter 40-way connector terminal at the following pins:

• Pins 21 to 31• Pins 23 to 33• Pins 22 to 32

If the resistance between pins 21 and 31 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 23 to 33 and pin 22 to 32 are each 33-37 ohms

Go to STEP H

If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V

403

Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP H

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Check for short between Inverter Pos (+) to Neg (-)

Short from Pos to Neg Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

No continuity Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP I

Procedure Condition Action

1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way diagnostic connector in the cab

2. Select the “Data Monitor” option

3. View the following parameters in the HV-Battery list:

• Battery Pack Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939)

• Battery Voltage PID 116 (SPN 520323 J1939)

If the voltage readings on PID 116 and PID 118 are within 10 volts of each other

Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

If the voltage readings on PID 116 and PID 118 are greater than 10 volts of each other

Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP J

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the DC high-voltage cables at the PEC bulkhead and at the Inverter

3. Measure the resistance between the two low voltage interlock pins on each end of the DC high-voltage cable

If resistance is 0 - 0.3 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V

404

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures

STEP K

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. The PEC main fuse MUST be removed before the PEC to Inverter high-voltage cable is disconnected from the PEC. Reference Service manual TRSM-2000 for the main fuse removal procedure

3. Remove PEC from vehicle Replace PEC. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 116 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 116 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

405

Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures

Battery Control Unit (BCU) Relay Cut Request Fault

SA 239

SPN 520251

FMI 3, 14, 29

Overview

The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter and monitored through a 5-volt input from the Inverter. If the relays are open the voltage is around 5 volts and when the relays are closed the voltage is around 1 volt.

Conditions to Run Fault

• The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts.

Conditions to Set Fault

• FMI 3 is set when Battery Control Unit (BCU) relay ready CAN flag is active and the relay off signal is set high for 0.02 seconds.

• FMI 14 is set when the BCU relay cut request is by a different active BCU fault.• FMI 29 is set when the Relay Off signal line is active.

Possible Causes

• FMI 3, 29- Inverter

- Low-voltage wire harness

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

When Fault Code 117 is set the following conditions will occur:

• The amber “Check Hybrid” lamp will display• Fault is stored in HCM memory• Inverter shuts high-voltage system off• HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode• Transmission defaults start gear to 1st

Conditions to Clear the Fault

The Eaton® service tool ServiceRanger may be used to clear the fault from TECU or HCM history. The TECU and HCM automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying Inactive.

406

Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• High-Voltage Gloves J48603 • Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Warnings and Cautions

A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death.

WARNINGTo reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

DANGERHAZARDOUS VOLTAGEYou will be severly injured or killedif you do not follow the procedure.Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only.

407

Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Connector Views

Connector Views

Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector

2. Key off

3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage

4. What FMIs are present If FMI 14 is listed Test complete. FMI 14 requires no action or replacement

If FMI 3 or 29 are listed Go to STEP B

Inverter

Relay Off

Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector)

8 9

1

2

345

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

13

3

5

PEC

Relay Off

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

10

20

30

40

1

11

21

31

Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector)

WARNING

408

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. View active faults to see if any of the following are listed: 76, 78, 82, 101, 103, 105, 107, 108

If any of the faults are listed with Fault Code 117 FMI 3

Go to test for faults that are active

If none of the faults are listed with FMI 3

Go to STEP C

If none of the faults are listed with FMI 29

Go to STEP D

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector

3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector.

4. Measure the resistance from the PEC 19-way connector pin 5 to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 13

If the resistance between pin 5 and pin 13 is 0 - 0.3 ohms

Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair the HCM Low-Voltage harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Remove the 40-pin connector from the Inverter

3. Use an ohm meter to measure the resistance from pin 3 to ground at the vehicle harness

If the resistance between pin 3 to ground is 0 to 0.3 ohms

Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V

If resistance is outside of range Repair 40-pin vehicle harness. Go to STEP V

409

Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable

3. Key on

4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code

6. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17

If no codes Test complete

If code 117 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing

If code other than 117 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19

410

Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures

411

Fault Code 166 Isolation Procedures

Instrument Cluster Message

SPN 84

FMI 2, 9

Overview

Fault Code 166 is generated from missing park brake message.

See OEM cluster messages for any repairs.

412

Instrument Cluster Message Fault Code 166 Isolation Procedures

413

Front Box Test

Front Box Test

Overview

This symptom-driven test is performed if a “-” or flashing gear is displayed on the Gear Display, and there are no active or inactive codes. Turn the key on and watch the Gear Display. If the Gear Display shows “-” constantly, the Transmission ECU was not able to confirm front box control. If the transmission displays a flashing gear when a forward or reverse mode is selected, the transmission is not able to engage the gear position.

Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes.

Possible Causes

• Low Power to Gear Select Motor• Electric Shifter• Gear Select Sensor• Yoke / Clutch / Main Shaft• Shift Bar Housing• Dragging Clutch• Torque Locked in Gear

Fallback Mode When Fault is Set

There is no fallback mode for this symptom, however, the vehicle will either not crank if the “-” is present or not engage a gear if the flashing gear is present when a non-neutral gear is selected.

Symptoms

• Power-up no crank and the gear display shows “-”• Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral (flashing gear number is gear display).

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

414

Connector Views Front Box Test

Connector Views

Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position.

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes

2. Key on

3. Depress “N” on the Push Button Shift Control

4. Observe Gear Display If Gear Display shows: “N” Go to STEP B

If Gear Display shows: “-” Go to STEP C

415

Front Box Test Isolation Procedures

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Depress service brake and select “D”

2. Observe Gear Display If Gear Display shows a solid gear

Test complete

If Gear Display shows a flashing gear with no arrows

Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Attempt to remove any type of torque lock on the vehicles drivetrain through one of the following methods:

a. Remove the driveshaftb. Lift the drive wheels off

the groundc. Roll the vehicle in neutral

3. Key on

4. Observe gear display If Gear Display shows a solid “N” Go to STEP B

If Gear Display still shows a solid “-”

Go to STEP D

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP E

If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest

Go to STEP A

416

Isolation Procedures Front Box Test

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Listen for noise from the Electric Shifter calibrating/actuating then turn the key off and listen for the same noise again

If the Electric Shifter can be heard calibrating/actuating

Go to STEP F

If the Electric Shifter can’t be heard calibrating

Go to STEP F

STEP F

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing

3. Inspect the following:

• Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely

• Shift rails move into each gear position

• Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup

• Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time

If no problem found and you could not hear the electric shifter actuation in the previous step

Replace the TECU. Go toSTEP V

If no problem found and you could hear the electric shifter actuation in the previous step

Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V

If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V

417

Front Box Test Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors

3. Place Shift Control into neutral

4. Key on If Gear Display displays a solid “N”

Test complete

If Gear Display does not display a solid “N”

Return to STEP A to find error in testing

418

Isolation Procedures Front Box Test

419

Engine Crank Test

Engine Crank Test

Overview

This symptom-driven test is performed if a “N” is displayed on the Gear Display with no active or inactive codes and the vehicle will not crank.

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) receives the input to crank from pin 20 on the HCM 38-way Vehicle Connector, which is wired to the key switch. The HCM normally powers the High-Voltage Motor/Generator to start the engine. If the Hybrid system is offline, the HCM will use the standard 24-volt starter by energizing the 24-volt Cranking relay. This relay then provides battery power to pin 30 of the Start Enable Relay, which then powers the starter solenoid.

Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes.

Symptom

Vehicle will not crank or there is a solid “N” in the gear display.

Possible Causes

• 24-volt Cranking Relay• Start Enable Relay• OEM Vehicle Harness• Engine Starter• 24-volt batteries• Key switch input to pin 20 of the HCM

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

420

Engine Crank Test Wiring Schematic Engine Crank Test

Engine Crank Test Wiring Schematic

Harness Front View

(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6

12

13 22

23 28 29 34

7

TECU

HCM

30

86

87 85

26

87

86

85

30

32 Crank Enable Plus

Start Enable Latch

Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 6 7 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Typical Relay Switch

Start Enable Relay

24V Truck Battery

24V

Plus

4 Crank Enable Minus

4 Start Enable Minus

87

86

85

30

24V CrankingRelay26 Crank Enable Latch

Start Enable Plus 32

NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations

Starter solenoid

Key Switch

20

Off Ignition

Crank

Engine Crank Request

421

Engine Crank Test

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes

2. Key on

3. Depress “N” on the Push Button Shift Control

Note: The ePTO lamp must be off when using the key switch to start the vehicle

If “N” is present on the Gear Display

Go to STEP B

If “N” is not present on the Gear Display

Refer to the Diagnostic Procedure for the correct Symptom based test to perform

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector

3. Select the Data Monitor option and view the “Crank Request” parameter

If Crank Request reads 1 (Crank) Go to Step C.

If Crank Request reads 0 (No Crank)

Go to Step E.

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Substitute a different start enable and 24-volt cranking relay

2. Attempt to crank engine If engine cranks Pinpoint which of the two relays was at fault and replace it.Go to STEP V

If engine does not crank Go to STEP D

422

Engine Crank Test

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

Engine may crank

2. Jumper pin 87 of the start enable relay connector to battery power

If engine cranks Repair open circuit between pin 87 of the start enable relay and battery. Refer to OEM for repair procedures.

If engine does not crank Concern is with starter solenoid or power harness to solenoid. Refer to OEM for repair procedures

STEP E

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Disconnect negative battery cable

3. Disconnect HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector

4. Key in start position

5. Measure voltage from HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 20 to ground

If voltage is 23-25 volts Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V

If voltage is below 23 volts Repair the OEM vehicle harness. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors

3. Place Shift Control into neutral

4. Key on If engine starts Test complete

If engine does not start Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

WARNING

423

Hybrid Performance Test

Hybrid Performance Test

Overview

The Hybrid System uses a combination of diesel engine and electric power to provide varying levels of torque during vehicle operation. If the Hybrid system has a fault, or if a hybrid component is above the optimum operating temperature, the vehicle will reduce the amount of available Motor/Generator torque.

Note: Some faults codes will affect the amount of torque available from the Motor/Generator and will be noticeable to the driver.

Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes.

Symptoms

• Vehicle acceleration performance is not acceptable

Possible Causes

• Hybrid liquid cooling system • PEC air cooling system restriction or poor air flow• Reduce engine power• Truckload capacity above the rated amount

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

424

Isolation Procedures Hybrid Performance Test

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab and view the following Data Monitor parameters under the Hybrid (Engine and Brake) list:

• SPN 513 Actual Engine Torque

• SPN 518 Requested Engine Torque

If actual torque is equal to requested torque

Go to STEP B

If actual torque is less than requested torque

Refer to OEM for engine power concern. Go to STEP V

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Select the “Data Monitor” option and view the following parameter:

• Battery Temperature PID 115

If Battery temperature is below 40°C

Refer to OEM for engine power concern. Go to STEP V

If temperature if above 40°C inspect the battery cooling system for the following.

• Plugged intake or exhaust ports

• Restricted or plugged air filter

• Failed battery cooling fan

Refer to the OEM for procedures and specifications. Make necessary and go to STEP V

425

Hybrid Performance Test Isolation Procedures

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off

2. Reconnect all connectors

3. Place Shift control into neutral.

4. Key on If vehicle exhibits normal amount of power

Test complete

If vehicle seems to produce lack power

Return to STEP A to find error in testing

426

Isolation Procedures Hybrid Performance Test

427

Gear Engagement Test

Gear Engagement Test

Overview

The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) normally commands the different gears shifts which are done through the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU). The HCM also controls the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), which changes the position of the clutch.

Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes.

Symptoms

• Transmission will not engage a gear from Neutral and warning tone sounds (Solid “N” in Gear Display).

• Transmission will not engage a gear from Neutral (Flashing Gear in Gear Display). This symptom is addressed in the Front Box Symptom test.

• Transmission will not move from a stop (Solid Gear number in Gear Display).

Messages from the Body Controller to the HCM

Messages from the Engine, Chassis, or Body Controller to the TECU

Possible Causes

• Transmission• Service Brake Switch• Boom/Outrigger switch

Required Tools

• Basic Hand Tools• Eaton® Test Adapter Kit J-43318• Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708• ServiceRanger

Signal Value Meaning Description

Prohibit Driving 01

Allow DrivingProhibit Driving

Body Controller is requesting the HCM not allow gear engagement from neutral.

Signal Value Meaning Description

Brake Switch 01

Not AppliedApplied

The ECU is confirming the current state of the service brake switch.

428

Isolation Procedures Gear Engagement Test

Isolation Procedures

STEP A

Procedure Condition Action

1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes

2. Depress “N” on the Push Button Shift Control

If “N” is present on the Gear Display

Go to STEP B

If “N” is not present on the Gear Display

Refer to the Diagnostic Procedure for the correct symptom based test to perform

STEP B

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. Start engine

3. Depress service brake and select “D”

If gear display shows a “N” and a warning tone sounds

Go to STEP D

If Gear Display shows a flashing gear with no arrows

Go to Front Box Test

If Gear Display shows a solid gear, but vehicle will not move

Go to STEP C

STEP C

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on.

2. Connect ServiceRanger and view the following Data Monitor parameter PID 154 “Prohibit Driving”

Prohibit Driving reads 0 (Allow Driving)

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP [4357]

Prohibit Driving reads 1 (Prohibit Driving)

Ensure boom and outriggers are fully retracted. Contact your OEM for repair procedures. Go to STEP V

429

Gear Engagement Test Isolation Procedures

STEP D

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key on

2. View the following Data Monitor parameter while depressing the service brake:

• SPN 597 “Service Brake Status”

If the service brake switch status is depressed when you apply the brakes

Contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP [4357]

If the service brake switch does not change status

Repair service brake wiring or switch. Contact your OEM for repair procedures. Go to STEP V

STEP V

Procedure Condition Action

1. Key off.

2. Reconnect all connectors.

3. Place Shift Control into neutral.

4. Key on. If the transmission will engage a gear and move from a stop

Test complete.

If the transmission will not engage a gear or move from a stop

Return to STEP A to find error in testing.

430

Isolation Procedures Gear Engagement Test

431

Wiring Diagrams

Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller

432

Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller Wiring Diagrams

433

Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Con-

Hybrid Transmission ECU System Harness

Gear selectmotor

Rail selectmotor

Electricshifter

A

B

A

B

Rail selectsensor

Gear selectsensor

Input shaft speed sensor

Output shaftspeed sensor

181920

101112

78

2324

A

B

C

A

B

C

3537

3638

B

C

A

173125

D

For TransmissionDiagnostics

4-way

B - Service Bat. +C - Service Bat. -A - Service Ignition +

BCA

Transmission ECU

434

Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller Wiring Diagrams

435

Connector Pin Description

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

TECU and HCM Connectors

Please note the location and orientation of the HCM and TECU connectors.

HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector

TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector

HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector

Terminal Side - Harness Connector(HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Terminal Side - Harness Connector (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

Terminal Side - Harness Connector (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)

3738

3536

16

12

1322

23282934

7

436

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

The backshell should always face down on the harness connectors.

437

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Transmission Controller 38-Way (Vehicle Interface Connector)

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Not Used 1 Plug

J1939 Low (CAN) TECU 2 1939 Backbone B 18 TXL

J1939 High (CAN) TECU 3 1939 Backbone A 18 TXL

Start Enable Relay Minus

TECU 4 AS Start Enable Relay 85 18 TXL

Not Used 5 Plug

Not Used 6 Plug

Not Used 7 Plug

Not Used 8 Plug

Not Used 9 Plug

J1587 Plus TECU 10 Splice into 1587 A 18 TXL

J1587 Minus TECU 11 Splice into 1587 B 18 TXL

Not Used 12 Plug

Not Used 13 Plug

Not Used 14 Plug

Not Used 15 Plug

Not Used 16 Plug

Not Used 17 Plug

Not Used 18 Plug

Not Used 19 Plug

Not Used 20 Plug

Not Used 21 Plug

Not Used 22 Plug

Not Used 23 Plug

Not Used 24 Plug

Shift Control Power Minus

TECU 25 PBSC J3 18 TXL

Start Enable Latch TECU 26 AS Start Enable Relay 87 18 TXL

HIL Low (Proprietary CAN)

TECU 27 PBSC F2 18 TXL

HIL High (Proprietary CAN)

TECU 28 PBSC F1 18 TXL

Not Used 29 Plug

Not Used 30 Plug

Shift Control Power Plus

TECU 31 PBSC C1 18 TXL

Start Enable Relay Plus

TECU 32 AS Start Enable Relay 86 18 TXL

Not Used 33 Plug

Not Used 34 Plug

438

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Ignition TECU 35 10A Fused Switched Power from Ignition Bus

12 GXL or 14SXL

Battery Minus TECU 36 Ground at Battery or Starter

12 GXL

Not Used 37 Plug

Battery Plus TECU 38 30A Fused Non-Switched

12 GXL

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

439

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Hybrid Controller 38-Way (Vehicle Interface Connector)

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Not Used 1 Plug

J1939 Low (CAN) HCM 2 1939 Backbone B 18 TXL

J1939 High (CAN) HCM 3 1939 Backbone A 18 TXL

24V Cranking Relay Minus

HCM 4 24V Cranking Relay

85 Plug

Not Used 5 Plug

Not Used 6 Plug

Not Used 7 Plug

Not Used 8 Plug

Not Used 9 Plug

J1587 Plus HCM 10 Splice into 1587 18 TXL

J1587 Minus HCM 11 Splice into 1587 18 TXL

Not Used 12 Plug

Not Used 13 Plug

Not Used 14 Plug

Not Used 15 Plug

Not Used 16 Plug

Not Used 17 Plug

PTO Signal HCM 18 PTO 18 TXL

Not Used 19 Plug

Engine Crank Request HCM 20 Crank Position on Switch

18 TXL

Not Used 21 Plug

Not Used 22 Plug

Service Lamp HCM 23 4-pin Service Connector

D 18 TXL

PTO Request (Non J1939 BCU)

HCM 24 BCU 18 TXL

Not Used 25 Plug

24V Cranking Relay Latch

HCM 26 24V Cranking Relay

87 18 TXL

CAN Low (Proprietary CAN)

HCM 27 HEV Backbone B 18 TXL

CAN High (Proprietary CAN)

HCM 28 HEV Backbone A 18 TXL

Not Used 29 Plug

Not Used 30 Plug

Not Used 31 Plug

24V Cranking Relay Plus

HCM 32 24V Cranking Relay

86 18 TXL

Not Used 33 Plug

Not Used 34 Plug

440

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Ignition HCM 35 Fused 10A to Ignition Relay

12 GXL or 14SXL

Battery Minus HCM 36 Battery Ground 12 GXL

Not Used 37 Plug

Battery Plus HCM 38 Fused 30A Battery 12 GXL

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

441

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Hybrid Controller 38-Way (Hybrid System Interface Connector)

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Not Used 1 Plug

Inverter Enable HCM 2 Inverter 9 and 10 18 TXL

Not Used 3 Plug

Coolant Pump & Battery Fan Relay Minus

HCM 4 Coolant Pump Relay & Battery Fan Relay

85 18 TXL

High-Voltage Relay Minus

HCM 5 High-Voltage Relay 4 18 TXL

PTO Power Minus HCM 6 PTO 18 TXL

Not Used 7 Plug

Not Used 8 Plug

Not Used 9 Plug

Not Used 10 Plug

DC/DC Converter Temperature

HCM 11 DC/DC Converter 3 18 TXL

Not Used 12 Plug

ECA Ignition HCM 13 ECA H 18 TXL

Not Used 14 Plug

Not Used 15 Plug

Not Used 16 Plug

Service Battery Plus 17 Service Port A 18 TXL

Not Used 18 Plug

DC/DC Converter Feedback Voltage

HCM 19 DC/DC Converter 1 18 TXL

Not Used 20 Plug

Not Used 21 Plug

Not Used 22 Plug

Not used 23 Plug

Not Used 24 Plug

Service Ignition HCM 25 Service Port C 18 TXL

Battery Cooling Fan Relay Plus

HCM 26 Battery Cooling Fan

86 18 TXL

Not Used 27 Plug

APG Enable HCM 28 APG C 18 TXL

Not Used 29 Plug

Not Used 30 Plug

Service Battery Minus HCM 31 Service Port B 18 TXL

Coolant Pump Relay Plus

HCM 32 Coolant Pump Relay

86 18 TXL

High-Voltage Relay Plus

HCM 33 High-Voltage Relay 3 18 TXL

PTO Power Plus HCM 34 PTO 18 TXL

442

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Heat Exchanger Plus HCM 35 HEF Relay 86 12 GXL or 14SXL

Not Used 36 Plug

Heat Exchanger Minus HCM 37 HEF Relay 85 18 TXL

Not Used 38 Plug

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

443

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Push Button Shift Control Connector

Push Button 30-Way Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

HIL High PBSC F1 TECU 28 18

HIL Low PBSC F2 TECU 27 18

Shift Control Power Minus

PBSC J3 TECU 25 18

Shift Control Power Plus

PBSC C1 TECU 31 18

Vdash PBSC B3 TECU Spliced 18

27282531

Terminal Side - Harness ConnectorTransmission ECU Connector

(Vehicle Interface)

J1

Dimmer control input

Push Button Shift Control

Push Button Shift ControlDelphi 30-way connector

C2 F 2 F 1 J 3 C 1 B 3

Bulkhead connectorlocated at firewall

Terminal Side - Harness ConnectorPush Button Shift Control (Delphi 30-Way Connector)

Transmission ECU Connector (Vehicle Interface) Back side

of gaugesDash lights

37 38

35 36

1 67 12

13 22

23 28

29 34

ABCDEFGHJK

1

2

3

A1

A3

K1

K3

444

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Inverter Connectors

Inverter 40-Way Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Relay Off (0) Inverter 3 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL

CAN High 1 Inverter 4 HEV Backbone A 16 TXL

CAN Low 1 Inverter 5 HEV Backbone B 16 TXL

GND1 Inverter 6 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL

GND2 Inverter 7 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL

V-Batt1 (24V) Inverter 9 PEC 2 16 TXL

V-Batt2 (24V) Inverter 10 PEC 2 16 TXL

Relay Off Inverter 13 PEC 5 16 TXL

Relay Box Enable 1 Inverter 14 PEC 6 16 TXL

GND (BC1) Inverter 15 PEC 7 16 TXL

REZGS1 Inverter 18 Resolver Ground Shield 1 16 TXL

REZGS2 Inverter 19 Resolver Ground Shield 2 16 TXL

REZGR Inverter 20 Resolver Ground R Shield 16 TXL

PRECHRG (+) Inverter 21 PEC 17 16 TXL

Main (+) (+) Inverter 22 PEC 9 16 TXL

Main (-) (+) Inverter 23 PEC 13 16 TXL

Relay Box Enable 2 Inverter 24 PEC 6 16 TXL

GND (BC2) Inverter 25 PEC 7 16 TXL

TM_S Inverter 26 Temp Sensor Shield 16 TXL

REZS1 Inverter 28 Resolver 2 16 TXL

REZS2 Inverter 29 Resolver 6 16 TXL

ZZ

DETAIL DETAIL ZZSCALE SCALE 1/11/1

A: Phase U C: Phase W

B: Phase V

High-Voltage AC Amphenol Connector

Deutsch 40-way Connector

High-Voltage DCYazaki Connector

DC( - ) DC( + )

Breather

Mounting BracketCapscrews (2 x M5)

1

155 6

10

20

30

40

263635

25

31

21

11

16

Ground Strap Bracket

Deutsch 40-way Connector

445

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

REZ_Plus Inverter 30 Resolver 4 16 TXL

PRECHRG (-) Inverter 31 PEC 19 16 TXL

Main (+) (-) Inverter 32 PEC 11 16 TXL

Main (-) (-) Inverter 33 PEC 15 16 TXL

CAN High 2 Inverter 34 PEC 1 16 TXL

CAN-Low 2 Inverter 35 PEC 2 16 TXL

TMGND Inverter 36 Temp Sensor 2 16 TXL

TM Inverter 37 Temp Sensor 1 16 TXL

REZS3 Inverter 38 Resolver 1 16 TXL

REZS4 Inverter 39 Resolver 5 16 TXL

REZ_Minus Inverter 40 Resolver 3 16 TXL

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

446

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) Connectors

19-way Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

CAN High PEC 1 Inverter 14 18

CAN Low PEC 2 Inverter 28 18

Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way)

8 9

1

2

3

45

6

7 10

11

12

131415

16

17

18

19

High Voltage DC Connector 1to Inverter (Yazaki Connector)

High Voltage DC Connector 2to APG (Yazaki Connector)

High Voltage DC Connector 3to DCDC (Yazaki Connector)

Low Voltage Deutsch19 - Way Connector

Caution: The PEC 19-way low-voltage connector needs to have the back shell and strain relief such that the unit will not allow water entry from direct spray.

447

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

HV Relay (+) PEC 3 HCM 33 18

HV Relay (-) PEC 4 HCM 5 18

RelayOff PEC 5 Inverter 43 18

BCU (+) PEC 6 Inverter 16 18

BCU (-) PEC 7 Inverter 34 18

Main (+) + PEC 9 Inverter 30 18

Main (+) - PEC 11 Inverter 35 18

Main (-) + PEC 13 Inverter 31 18

Main (-) - PEC 15 Inverter 36 18

PreChg + PEC 17 Inverter 29 18

PreChg - PEC 19 Inverter 37 18

Battery Fan Plus PEC 12 Battery Fan Cooling Relay 87 12

Battery Fan Minus PEC 14 Battery Negative - 12

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

448

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

PEC High-Voltage (DC) Connector to Inverter

PEC High-Voltage (DC) Connector to DC/DC Converter

Inverter High-Voltage (AC) Connector

Inverter High-Voltage (DC) Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

DC + PEC A Inverter A 15mm²

DC - PEC B Inverter B 15mm²

Loose Disconnect PEC 1 PEC 2 0.8 mm² (18 AWG)

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

DC + PEC A DC/DC Converter

A 14 AWG

DC - PEC B DC/DC Converter

B 14 AWG

Loose Disconnect PEC 1 DC/DC Converter

1 0.8 mm² (18 AWG)

Loose Disconnect PEC 2 DC/DC Converter

2 0.8 mm² (18 AWG)

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Phase 1 Inverter A Motor/Gen A 4 AWG

Phase 2 Inverter B Motor/Gen B 4 AWG

Phase 3 Inverter C Motor/Gen C 4 AWG

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

DC + Inverter A PEC A 15mm²

DC - Inverter B PEC B 15mm²

Loose Disconnect Inverter 1 Inverter 2 0.8 mm² (18 AWG)

449

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) Connectors

ECA 3-Way Connector

ECA 8-Way Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Ignition ECA A Not Used Plug

Battery Minus ECA B Chassis Ground Battery - 12

Battery Plus ECA C Fused 50 amp from Vbatt

Battery + 12

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

CAN High ECA A CAN Backbone A 18

CAN Low ECA B CAN Backbone B 18

CAN - Pass ECA C Not Used Plug

Signal ECA D Not Used Plug

CAN + Pass ECA E Not Used Plug

Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor Plus

ECA F Speed Sensor + A 18

Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor Minus

ECA G Speed Sensor - B 18

ECA Ignition ECA H HCM 13 18

HCM

28 27

A B

A B

F G F G

50 AMP fuse

Battery power (Non-switched power)

run to the Battery

Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor (Eaton Supplied)

A B C

Terminal Side - Harness Connector Metri-Pack 3-Way Connector

Terminal Side - Harness Connector Metri-Pack 8-Way Connector

13

E F G H

D C B A

A B C

450

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Motor/Generator Connectors

Views looking into connectors with wires exiting the opposite side.

Terminal Side - Harness Connector Temperature Sensor

(Deutsch 2-pin connector)

Terminal Side - Harness Connector Resolver

(Deutsch 6-pin connector)

High Voltage AC Ampenol Connector

Temperature SensorConnector

Low Voltage Deutsch Resolver Connector

Low Voltage Deutsch

Bottom View

Ground StrapBracket

Ground Strap

451

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

Motor/Generator Resolver Connector

Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor Connector

Motor/Generator High-Voltage (AC) Connector

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Resolver Signal 3 Motor/Gen 1 EPS Inverter 38 18

Resolver Signal 2 Motor/Gen 2 EPS Inverter 28 18

Resolver Signal 1 Motor/Gen 3 EPS Inverter 40 Plug

Resolver Signal 4 Motor/Gen 4 EPS Inverter 30 Plug

Resolver - Motor/Gen 5 EPS Inverter 39 Plug

Resolver + Motor/Gen 6 EPS Inverter 29 18

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Motor Temp Motor/Gen 1 EPS Inverter 37 18

Motor Temp Gnd Motor/Gen 2 EPS Inverter 36 18

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Phase 1 Motor/Gen U Inverter U 4 AWG

Phase 2 Motor/Gen V Inverter V 4 AWG

Phase 3 Motor/Gen W Inverter W 4 AWG

452

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

Typical DC/DC Converter Circuit

Remove the 24-volt battery cables prior to working on the DC/DC converter.

DC(-)

DC(+)

24V DC(+)

24V DC(-)

High Voltage DC Yazaki Connector

OEM Connection

Deutsch 4-Way OEM Connector

453

Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins

DC/DC Converter 4-Way Deutsch OEM Connector

Converter High-Voltage (DC) Connector

Converter 24-volt Studs

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

Ground DC/DC 4 Ground 18

Thermocouple DC/DC 3 HCM 11 18

Not Used DC/DC 2 Not Used Plug

Voltage Feedback DC/DC 1 HCM 19 18

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

DC + DC/DC A PEC A 14

DC - DC/DC B PEC B 14

Loose Disconnect DC/DC 1 PEC 1 18

Loose Disconnect DC/DC 2 PEC 2 18

Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG

24volt + DC/DC A Battery Positive Post

A 2

24volt - DC/DC B Battery Negative Post

B 2

454

Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description

www.eaton.com/greensolutions

Copyright Eaton Corporation, 2012. Eaton hereby grant their customers, vendors, or distributors permission to freely copy, reproduce and/or distribute this document in printed format. It may be copied only in its entirety without any changes or modifications. THIS INFORMATION IS NOT INTENDED FOR SALE OR RESALE, AND THIS NOTICE MUST REMAIN ON ALL COPIES.

Note: Features and specifications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the software and products with all options installed. Although every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy of information contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness or accuracy and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.

For spec’ing or service assistance, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357) or visit www.eaton.com/roadranger.In Mexico, call 001-800-826-4357.

Eaton CorporationVehicle GroupP.O. Box 4013Kalamazoo, MI 49003 USA800-826-HELP (4357)www.eaton.com/roadranger

Printed in USA

Roadranger: Eaton and trusted partners providing the best products and services in the industry, ensuring more time on the road.


Recommended